Toon Boom
Harmony24 Essentials
Reference Guide

TOON BOOM ANIMATION INC.

+1 514 278 8666

55 Mont-Royal Avenue West, Suite 1000
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
H2T 2S6

contact@toonboom.com
toonboom.com

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Legal Notices
Toon Boom Animation Inc.
55 avenue du Mont-Royal Ouest
Montréal Québec, Canada
H2T 2S6

Tel: +1 514 278 8666
Fax: +1 514 278 2666
toonboom.com

Disclaimer
The content of this document is the property of Toon Boom Animation Inc. and is copyrighted. Any
reproduction in whole or in part is strictly prohibited.
The content of this document is covered by a specific limited warranty and exclusions and limit of liability
under the applicable License Agreement as supplemented by the special terms and conditions for

Adobe®Flash® File Format (SWF). For details, refer to the License Agreement and to those special terms andconditions.

Trademarks
Toon Boom® is a registered trademark. Harmony™ and the Toon Boom logo are trademarks of Toon Boom
Animation Inc. All other trademarks of the property of their respective owners.

Publication Date
07-25-2024
Copyright © 2024 Toon Boom Animation Inc. All rights reserved.

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents

2

Introduction

7

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

8

Add Column Dialog Box

10

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

12

Add Frames Dialog Box

13

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

15

Create Palette Dialog Box

18

Edit Pencil Lines

19

Export Images Dialog Box

24

Export to Animated GIF Dialog Box

30

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

33

Export to Video Dialog Box

36

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

39

Extend Exposure Dialog Box

43

Import Images Dialog Box

44Marker Dialog Box

46

Mini Playback Dialog Box

48

Movie Options Dialog Box (macOS)

49

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

53

New Scene Dialog Box

56

Paste Preset Dialog Box

58

Paste Special Dialog Box

60

Pen Pressure Feel Dialog Box

63

Preferences Dialog Box

66

Recolour Drawings Dialog Box

69

Remove Frames Dialog Box

71

Scene Settings Dialog Box

73

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

772

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Select Colour Dialog Box

79

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

81

Set Ease on Keyframes Dialog Box

83

Sound Element Editor Dialog Box

85

OpenQuickTime Sound Options Dialog Box (GNU/Linux)

87

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

89

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

92

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

97

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

98

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

99

OpenQuickTime Video Options Dialog Box (GNU/Linux)

108

Windows Media Video Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

111

Chapter 2: Menus

114

Main Menus

115

Animation Menu

116

Drawing Menu

121

Edit Menu

126

File Menu

129

Help Menu

132

Insert Menu

134

Play Menu

136

Scene Menu

138

View Menu

140

Windows Menu

145

View Menus

147

Colour View Menu

148

Function View Menu

151

Library View Menu

153

Script Editor View Menu

155

Chapter 3: Layers

160

3

Table of Contents

Deformation Layers

161

Bone Layers

162

Deformation Composite Layer

164

Game Bone Layer

165

Kinematic Output Layer

167

Effect Layers

168

Blur Layer

169

Colour-Scale Layer

171

Cutter Layer

173

Glow Layer

175

Shadow Layer

178

Transparency Layer

181

Image Layers

182

Colour-Card Layer

183

Drawing Layer

185

Move Layers

190

Camera Layer

191

Peg Layer

192

Quadmap Layer

194

Sound Layer

197

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

198

Brush Tool Properties

200

Centerline Editor Tool Properties

209

Close Gap Tool Properties

211

Contour Editor Tool Properties

212

Cutter Tool Properties

216

Edit Gradient/Texture Tool Properties

219

Ellipse Tool Properties

220

Envelope Tool Properties

224

Eraser Tool Properties

227

4

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Line Tool Properties

234

Paint Tool Properties

241

Pencil Tool Properties

243

Perspective Tool Properties

248

Polyline Tool Properties

251

Rectangle Tool Properties

255

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

260

Rigging Tool Properties

262

Select Tool Properties

264

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

274

Stamp Tool Properties

276

Stroke Tool Properties

285

Text Tool Properties

287

Transform Tool Properties

290

Zoom Tool Properties

294

Chapter 5: Toolbars

296

Workspace Toolbars

297

Advanced Animation Toolbar

298

Deformation Toolbar

299

Edit Toolbar

302

File Toolbar

303

Game Toolbar

304

Mini Playback Toolbar

305

Pen Settings Toolbar

306

Playback Toolbar

309

Scripting Toolbar

312

Tools Toolbar

313

Workspace Toolbar

319

View Toolbars

320

Camera View Toolbar

321

5

Table of Contents

Drawing View Toolbar

323

Library View Toolbar

324

Port Names Toolbar

325

Script Editor Toolbar

326

Timeline View Toolbar

330

Xsheet View Toolbar

334

Chapter 6: Views

336

Camera View

337

Colour View

346

Drawing View

351

Drawing Substitutions View

353

Function View

355

Guides View

358

Integrated Help View

362

Layer Properties View

363

Library View

365

Master Controller View

368

Message Log View

370

Metadata Editor View

371

Python Script Console View

373

Script Editor View

374

Side View

378

Timeline View

380

Tool Properties View

389

Top View

390

Xsheet View

392

6

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Introduction
Harmony has several commands, dialog boxes, and buttons. The Reference section lists all of them along withthe matching definition. To understand how to use these functions in a production context, read the User
guide.
In the Reference guide, you will learn about the various parameters available in dialog boxes, menus, nodes,
toolbars, views, and windows.
The Preferences guide provides additional details about each individual preference.

7

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes contain controls such as options and lists through which you can carry out a particular commandor task. For example, in the Scene Settings dialog box, you must indicate the resolution and alignment. A
typical dialog box looks as follows:

Add Column Dialog Box

10

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

12

Add Frames Dialog Box

13

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

15

Create Palette Dialog Box

18

Edit Pencil Lines

19

Export Images Dialog Box

24

Export to Animated GIF Dialog Box

30

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

33

Export to Video Dialog Box

36

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

39

Extend Exposure Dialog Box

43

Import Images Dialog Box

44Marker Dialog Box

46

Mini Playback Dialog Box

48

8Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Movie Options Dialog Box (macOS)

49

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

53

New Scene Dialog Box

56

Paste Preset Dialog Box

58

Paste Special Dialog Box

60

Pen Pressure Feel Dialog Box

63

Preferences Dialog Box

66

Recolour Drawings Dialog Box

69

Remove Frames Dialog Box

71

Scene Settings Dialog Box

73

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

77

Select Colour Dialog Box

79

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

81

Set Ease on Keyframes Dialog Box

83

Sound Element Editor Dialog Box

85

OpenQuickTime Sound Options Dialog Box (GNU/Linux)

87

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

89

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

92

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

97

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

98

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

99

OpenQuickTime Video Options Dialog Box (GNU/Linux)

108

Windows Media Video Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

111

9Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Add Column Dialog Box
The Add Column dialog box lets you add a column in the Xsheet view.
By default, when you create a new scene, there is one drawing column in the Xsheet view and one
corresponding drawing layer in the Timeline view.
You can add an element for each drawing and it will appear as a column in the Xsheet view, a layer in theTimeline view.

How to access the Add Column dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Xsheet menu, right-click a column and select Add Columns.

lClick the Add Columns

lPress Shift + C.

button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new column a meaningful name.

Type

Lets you select a type of column to create. Choices include: Drawing, Timing,
Sound, 3D Path, 3D Rotation, Bezier Curve, Ease Curve, Expression andAnnotation.

Drawing Layer Options
Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing column in the Line Art layer.

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing column in the Colour Art layer.

Element
Create New Element

Creates an independent column with its own drawing folder.

Vector

Select this option if you want the layer to contain vector drawings. Deselect thisoption if you want the layer to contain bitmap images. Most of the time, theVector option will be enabled.

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the type of bitmap image to insert in the column. Select SCAN

10

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

from the list if you are planning to scan drawings using the Toon Boom Harmony
Essentials Scan module.

Scan TypeIf you chose SCAN from the Bitmap Format list, select the kind of scanning you
want to achieve.

Field Chart

When importing traditional animation, lets you indicate the size of paper on which
the animation or background was drawn. If you are not using perforated
animation paper, leave the 12 field default value as is.

Use Existing Element

Uses drawings from an existing column in the new column. Both columns will be
attached to the same set of drawings, but their timing will remain independent
from one another. If you modify one of the drawings, it will be modified in bothcolumns. This is the same principle as the Clone column.

Name

Lets you select the column to which you want to link your new column.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns
are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as manylayers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns are automatically
numbered incrementally.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

11

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Add Drawing Layer dialog box lets you add a drawing layer to your project.
By default, when you create a new scene, there is one drawing column in the Xsheet view and one
corresponding drawing layer in the Timeline view.
You can add an element for each drawing and it will appear as a column in the Xsheet view, a layer in theTimeline view.

How to access the Add Drawing Layer dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, click the Add Drawing Layerl

From the top menu, select Insert > Drawing.

l

Press Ctrl + R (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + R (macOS).

button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new layer a meaningful name.

Extend Exposure for Scene
Duration

Automatically create and empty drawing exposure on each layer and expose
them for the duration of the scene.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns
are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as manylayers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns are automatically
numbered incrementally.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

12

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Add Frames Dialog Box
The Add Frames dialog box allows you to add a given amount of frames at a specific point in your scene. The
new frames are added to every layer in your scene and will offset all the keyframes and drawings after theinsertion point.

How to access the Add Frames dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a frame or a range of frames.

2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Scene > Frame > Add Frames at Start, Add Frames at End, Add
Frames Before Selection or Add Frames After Selection.

l

In the Xsheet view, right-click and select Frame > Add Frames at Start, Add Frames at End,
Add Frames Before Selection or Add Frames After Selection.

l

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the

Add Frames button to add frames after your selection.

lPress Ctrl + G (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + G (macOS) to add frames before the selection, orCtrl + H to add frames after the selection.

The Add Frames dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Number of frames to add

The amount of frames to add.

13

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Ripple Scene Markers

If checked, scene markers after the insertion point will be offset forward to remain
synchronized with the keyframes and drawings in your scene. If unchecked, scene
markers will remain in place while everything else after the insertion point isoffset.
If checked, drawings that are exposed just before the insertion point will be
exposed throughout the added rames. If unchecked, no drawing will be exposedin the added frames.

Extend Drawing Exposure

NOTE
This option has no effect when adding frames at the start of the scene.

14Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Create Function Step On Dialog Box
The Create Function Step On dialog box lets you hold the same value over a selected number of frames for
multiple parameters (pos x, scale y, etc.). This works well when you are animating drawings on 2s or 3s, forexample, and you want to hold the same value for a function over those two or three frames.

How to access the Create Function Step On dialog box
1. Add the Scripting toolbar to your interface:l

Go to the top menu and select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.

lright-click on the empty space near the top of the interface and from the quick-access menu
selecting Scripting.

lright-click on the empty space near the top of a view and from the quick-access menu
selecting Scripting.

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the Manage Scripts

button to open the Scripts Manager

window.
3. In the Scripts Manager, in the Files section, select the file TB_CreateStepsOn.js.
The functions associated with that file appear in the Functions section.
4. In the Functions section, select TB_CreateStepsOn.
The Add script to toolbar

button becomes active.

15

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

5. Click on the Add script to toolbar
The TB_CreateStepsOn script

button.
button is added to the Scripting toolbar.

6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Timeline view, select the layer whose parameter values you would like to hold.
9. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the TB_CreateStepsOn script

button.

The Create Function Step On dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Settings
Every Number of Frames

Enter in the number of frames you would like to hold your functions.

16Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Selection

First Frame

Enter in the frame number of where you would like the stepped holds tostart. The playhead location determines the lowest value you can enterfor the first frame. You need to move the playhead to frame one if you
would like to set frame one as the lowest possible starting value.

Last Frame

Enter in the frame number of where you would like the stepped holds to
stop.

17

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Create Palette Dialog Box
The Create Palette dialog box allows you to create a colour palette for your scene. Palettes created with this
dialog box are added to your scene's palette list, and stored in your scene's palette-library subdirectory.

How to access the Create Palette dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Colour View, click the New Palettebutton over the palette list.

lFrom the Colour view menu, select Palettes > New

Parameter

Description

New Palette Name

Allows you to type in the name of the palette to create.

18Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Edit Pencil Lines
The Edit Pencil Lines Dialog Box lets you edit the pencil lines’ properties such as pencil texture and line
thickness.

19

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Icon

Parameter

Description

Allows you to add and delete
presets. This can be done using the
Add Preset and Delete Preset
buttons on the right of the list.
The default preset name is Custom.
Presets are saved in a file in the user
preferences.
Presets

NOTE
When modifying a saved
preset, the name willrevert back to Custom. Anychanges in values madewill in turn be treated as a
new preset without
altering the original.

Allows you to select a texture for the
pencil line.
Selecting <Remove Texture> willremove any existing texture from theline before alterations.

TextureSelecting <Keep Texture As Is> will
maintain the existing texture andallow it to be altered.

Thickness MultiplierWill allow you to thicken or thin aline by a specified value.

Apply Multiplier to Tips

Check Apply Multiplier to Tips
below to apply the multiplication to
the pencil line tips.
Apply an additional multiplier toextend the line tips. This will affect
the quality of the line’s head and tail.

Additional Tip Multiplier

A lower number will create a flatter,more abrupt head and tail.
A higher value will create a rounder20

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Parameter

Description

and tapered appearance.
Will convert the pencil line thickness
to the specified numerical value.

NOTE
Set Thickness

Must choose to use either
the Thickness Multiplieror the Set Thickness
option. They cannot be
used simultaneously.

When checked, modifications are
made to all pencil lines, regardless of
their colours.
This option will be beneficial if there
are multiple coloured lines being
stylized in the same way.

Apply to All Colours

NOTE
This checkbox will not be
available if only one pencil
colour is selected.

This dropdown menu will allow you
to select one or more coloured lines
to be affected.
This is useful when you want one ormore specific coloured lines to be
influenced but not all.

Apply to Colours

NOTE
This dropdown will not be
available if only one pencil
colour is selected.

When checked, the pencil stylechanges will apply to all selected

Apply to All Drawings

21

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Icon

Parameter

Description

pencil lines on all layers.
When unchecked, the pencil stylechanges will only apply to the pencil
lines of the currently selected layer.
The dropdown field is enabled when
multiple drawings are selected. The
dropdown will list all of the selecteddrawing layers. The drawing you
select will appear in the preview
window below.

Preview Drawings

Allows you to adjust backgroundcolour. The background colour can be
Slidershifted between black and white.
This allows for greater visibility ofcertain colours.

Will zoom in to the drawing being
previewed.
Zoom InTIP
You can zoom in using themouse wheel.

Will zoom out of the drawing being
previewed.

Zoom Out22

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Parameter

Description

TIP
You can zoom out using
the mouse wheel.

NOTE
You can pan your drawing by clicking and dragging anywhere within the preview area. This ability
is most beneficial when the drawing selected is larger than the preview area.

23Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Export Images Dialog Box
The Export Images dialog box allows you to export your scene as a sequence of image files, with one image
for each frame.

How to access the Export Images dialog box
1. In the top menu, select File > Export > Images.

Parameter

Description

OutputPrefixThe prefix for the file name of each exported image file. Each file name will start with thevalue in this field, followed by the number of the frame.
The directory in which to export the rendered frames.

Path

You can click Browse... to open a dialog allowing you to navigate your file system andselect a directory, or Default to set this to the frames sub-directory of your scene’s
directory.

FormatFile TypeThe image format in which the exported frames will be saved. The following formats aresupported:24

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

FormatDescription

Truevision TGA/TARGA (*.tga)
TGA

A standard image format with lossless compression and support fortransparency.
TGA files use more disk space than PNG files, but rendering in TGA isfaster.

Silicon Graphics Image (*.sgi)
SGI

A highly capable format with lossless compression as well as support for
double precision and transparency.

Photoshop Document (*.psd)
An Adobe Photoshop proprietary format used for image editing.
PSD files exported by Harmony contain a single background layer withthe rasterized image.
PSD

NOTE
PSD files exported from Harmony are tagged with their colour
space information in their metadata, except for PSD files
exported in greyscale.

Y'UV frame (*.yuv)
A legacy format optimized for NTSC television. The image information is
encoded in the Y'UV color space, which means Luma (Y') and
Chrominance (UV).
YUV

NOTE
YUV images must be exported in NTSC resolution (720 x 540), or
they will not be legible.

PAL

PAL frame (*.pal)
A legacy format optimized for PAL television.

25

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

FormatDescription

NOTE
PAL images must be exported in PAL resolution (768 x 576), or
they will not be legible.

Portable Network Graphics (*.png)
A highly portable image format with high lossless compression as wellas support for transparency and double-precision. PNG is typically used
for Web applications, graphical user interfaces and image sharing.
PNG

Rendering in PNG takes more time than rendering in TGA or in
uncompressed image formats, but saves a lot of disk space.

NOTE
PNG files exported from Harmony are tagged with their colour
space information in their metadata.

Toon Boom Optimized image (*.opt)
OPT

A legacy Toon Boom proprietary format that stores bitmap image datawith lossless compression. It supports transparency.

Tagged Image File Format (*.tiff)
TIF

An image format with many compression and encoding settings. It is
often used for image exchange in visual arts and publishing.
TIFF images exported by Harmony are uncompressed, encoded on a perpixel (interleaved) basis in PC byte order.

Digital Picture Exchange (*.dpx)
DPX

A professional photo format that supports various different approaches
to storing colour information, which can be used for storing, exchanging
and editing raw information recorded by cameras. It is commonly used infilm production.

OpenEXR (*.exr)
EXR

A highly capable deep image format. Each pixel in an EXR file is exportedwith its Z-depth information. Additionally, if a pixel is semi-transparent,
the color and depth information of pixels further back is stored along with26

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

FormatDescription

it. If your scene has multiplane or 3D elements, this format can be used
for compositing your animation with other graphical elements in 3D
animation software.

NOTES
l

OpenEXR files exported from Harmony are tagged with thewhite point and primaries coordinates for their colour space.

l

OpenEXR files are always exported by Harmony always
have 1 line Zip compression if they contain a 3D image.

Portable Document File (*.pdf)
Typically, PDF files are used to store, archive, share and print documents.
However, Harmony uses the PDF format for its capability to store bitmap
images and vector graphics.

PDF

If the write node is connected to a vector drawing layer or to a vector
composite, the exported PDF files will contain the image as a vector
graphic. It will ignore bitmap layers, effects and deformations. Otherwise,
the PDF files will contain the rendered image as a bitmap.

Depending on the selected file type, you can select one of the following colour modes:

ColourslColour: Exports images in three channels: red, green and blue.

lColour + Alpha: Exports images in four channels: red, green, blue and alpha.

l

Greyscale: Exports images in a single channel, grey.

NOTE
Only some file types support Colour + Alpha and Greyscale.

Depending on the selected file type, you can select one of the following colour depth:
l

Depth

l

8-bits / channel: The standard colour depth. Each channel can have a value
ranging from 0 and 255. Displays typically only support this much precision.
16-bits /channel: Also known as double-precision. Each channel can have a value
ranging from 0 to 65,536. Although displays typically can’t display at this
precision, this allows compositing several images with effects and feathering
without causing any dithering.

27

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

The colour space in which to render your frames. The rendered frames will be converted
from your scene’s working colour space to the selected colour space.
The following colour spaces are supported in Harmony:llScene Working Colour Space: The same colour space as the one selected in the
Colour Space tab of the Scene Settings dialog.
ACES2065-1: An ACES linear colour space that uses the AP0 colour primaries
and is intended for image file interchange.

l

l

l

l

Colour Space
l

l

l

l

l

l

ACEScg: An ACES linear colour space that uses the AP1 colour primaries and isintended for CGI rendering and compositing.
Linear Rec.709 (sRGB): The colour space that uses the same primaries and white
point as sRGB and Rec. 709, but with no gamma transfer curve applied to thecolour values.
Linear Rec. 2020: A colour space used for Ultra High Definition TV (UHDTV). It
has a complex gamma transfer curve and primaries that cover more of the humanperceivable colour space than other colour spaces, especially in the area of
human-perceivable greens.
Linear P3-D65: The same as Display P3, except with no gamma transfer curve.
This colour space is useful for compositing intermediary images that are meant tobe rendered in Display P3.
Display P3: A colour space commonly used for digital projection. It has the same
primaries as DCI-P3, the same white point as sRGB and the same gamma transfer
curve as sRGB.
Rec. 709: The colour space used for HDTV. It has the same primaries and white
point as sRGB, but has a different gamma transfer curve.
Rec. 709 2.4: The same colour space as Rec. 709 or sRGB, except with a gammatransfer curve of 2.4 (per ITU-R BT.1886). This colour space exists because someediting systems use a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 instead of the standard gamma
curve for Rec. 709.
Rec. 2020: A colour space used for Ultra High Definition TV (UHDTV). It has acomplex gamma transfer curve and primaries that cover more of the humanperceivable colour space than other colour spaces, especially in the area of
human-perceivable greens.
Rec. 2020 2.4: The same colour space as Rec. 2020, except with a simple gammatransfer curve of 2.4 (per ITU-R BT.1886). This colour space exists because someediting systems use a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 instead of the standard gamma
curve for Rec. 2020.
sRGB: A colour space typically used for standard computer monitors. It has thesame primaries and white point as Rec. 709, but has a different gamma transfer
curve.

28

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Range
All Frames

Exports all the frames in your scene.

Selected
FramesAllows you to specify the frame range to export using the two input fields to the right.
The first input field is for specifying the first frame to export, and the second one is for
specifying the last frame to export. All the frames in-between, including the ones
specified, will be exported.

Preview

If checked, the rendered frames will be opened in the Play application.

OK

Renders the frames with the selected settings and closes the dialog box.

CancelCloses the dialog box without rendering frames.

29

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Export to Animated GIF Dialog Box
Using the Export to Animated GIF dialog box, you can export your scene, or an excerpt of it, as an animated
GIF image.

Animated GIFs are a portable format commonly used for exchanging short animations and clips on the web.
They can be played in any web browser and in many image viewers.
Animated GIFs are a convenient sharing format, but they are not a publishing format. They are not as
optimized for fast download and playback as movie files, cannot contain audio and, most importantly, can only
contain up to 256 different colours throughout the entire animation. Hence, if your animation contains texturesor gradients, it is likely to lose quality when exported as an animated GIF, as Harmony will have to limit theamount of different colours used in the exported image.
NOTE
For steps on how to use the Export to Animated GIF dialog box, see the User Guide.

How to access the Export to Animated GIF dialog box
1. In the top menu, select File > Export > Animated GIF.
The Export to Animated GIF dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Output30

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Output

The full path and file name of the GIF file to export.

BrowseOpens a dialog allowing you to browse to the desired export directory and enter
the desired file name.

Export Range
All

Exports all the frames in your scene.

FramesAllows you to specify a range of frames to render.

Resolution
Lets you specify a resolution to export in relative to your scene's actual resolution:llResolution list

l

l

l

Same as Scene Resolution: Exports a movie in the same resolution as
your scene's resolution.
3/4 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 75% of the scene's widthand height.
1/2 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 50% of the scene's widthand height.
1/4 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 25% of the scene's widthand height.
Custom: Allows you specify the preferred resolution of your exported
video file, in pixels, in the Width and Height fields.

Width

If you selected the Custom resolution, use this field to specify the width, in pixels,of the exported movie.

Width

If you selected the Custom resolution, use this field to specify the height, in pixels,of the exported movie.

Options

Dithering

Options
Since GIF images can only have up to 256 colours, you have the option to add
dithering to the rendered image. Dithering blends pixels of different colours
where the image contains gradients to simulate colours that do not exist in the
GIF image's colour palette.

31

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

DescriptionllNone: No dithering will be applied. Each pixel rendered is rendered withthe colour in the palette that is the closest to its actual colour.

Diffusion: Blends pixels in irregular patterns to blend pixels and simulate
the colour as closely as possible.

lPattern: Blends pixels in regular checkered patterns to simulate thecolour without created clusters of pixels.

If this option is checked, the exported GIF animation will loop when previewed in
Loop

web browsers and other image viewers that support animated GIFs. Otherwise, itwill only play once and stop.

32

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box
The Export to Easel JS window lets you flatten an image sequence of your animation. Even if you have a fully
rigged puppet or a single drawing layer with your animation sequence, the outcome will still be a flattened
output of each frame, grouped together in your sprite sheet. This allows for more flexibility and freedom ofwork as you have access to any tools or effect modules you want to use. However, this can result in heavier
files depending on the length, complexity and export size of your animation.

How to access the Export to Easel JS window
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

2. Click the Export to Easel JS

Parameter

button.

Description

Select Directory

33

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Save Path

The folder path where you want to save your export.

Save Name

The folder name in which you will save your export. This will also be the name ofyour asset in Unity. Your scene file name will be used as the clip name.

Existing Clips in Folder

Displays the clips in the folder.

Scene Options

Display

Here, you must select the Display of your character. This is the one that will be
used to render out all of the information attached to that Display node. If the
Unconnected_Display option is selected, all of the visual information in yourscene will be rendered out.

Sprite Sheet Preferences
Max Width
Max HeightThis is a value, in pixels, for the maximum width and height the exported sprite
sheet should be. By default, both values are set to 2048 pixels.

Expand Sprite Sheet

Uses the minimum size necessary up until it reaches the maximum resolution.

Fixed Sprite Sheet

Creates a texture of the specified size (Max Width and Max Height) even if it does
not fill it up completely by all the drawings in your scene.

Resolution Type

POT: Exports to sprite sheets with sizes that are a power of 2. For example: 1024
x 1024. This is optimized for many graphics cards, but consumes more memory.
NPOT: Some game engines are optimized specifically to render to non powers of
two, so that it will avoid those numbers. Example: 1000 x 1000.

Reuse FramesThis option works in tandem with the Threshold option. The export will compare
the drawings in your project to reuse a maximum of similar drawings and reduce
the amount of information found in the sprite sheet, making it lighter. The export
will omit the creation of new drawings if the difference is less than the thresholdpercentage.

ThresholdCalculates the differences between multiple drawings. A 2% threshold will
prevent the creation of a new drawing if the drawing is too similar to an existingdrawing. For instance, with a 2% threshold, and my drawing is 100 pixels big,
only 2 of those pixels need to be different from my other drawing in order to34

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

create a new one. The higher the threshold, the fewer similar drawings you willhave.
Sprite Resolutions

Size of the render of the individual sprite, when it exports each drawing out.

35

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Export to Video Dialog Box
The Export to Video dialog box lets you export your animation as a movie file.

How to access the Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.

Parameter

Description

OutputAllows you to choose one of the following movie formats:Video FormatlQuickTime Movie (*.mov): The Apple QuickTime format. This is thedefault export format and is recommended for its portability, and also
because it allows you to choose among several video codecs.

36Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

NOTES
l

l

l

l

On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be installed to allow
Harmony to export QuickTime movies. You can configure
the export of QuickTime movies to use any codec that iscompatible with QuickTime, including H.264, MPEG-4 andAnimation.
On macOS, Harmony uses Apple AVFoundation to export
QuickTime movies, which allows you to export using codecs
such as H.264, Apple ProRes 422 and Apple ProRes 4444,
among others.
If you are looking to export a QuickTime movie withtransparency, be sure to choose a codec that supports
encoding with an alpha channel.

H.264/MPEG-4 (*.mov) : A simple movie format that uses the H.264
codec, which is supported by most web browsers.

NOTES
l

l

l

l

l

Using this format does not require additional software.
However, if this is the first time you export a movie in
H.264/MPEG-4 format, you will be prompted to download
the OpenH264 library from Cisco. Simply click Yes when
prompted, and Harmony will automatically download thelibrary, then export the movie.
There are no encoding options for this format.
This format supports resolutions of up to 4096×2304. Eachdimension must be a multiple of 16 pixels.
Audio exported in this format is encoded in PCM 16-bit
stereo, 22.05 kHz.

Windows Media Video (*.wmv): The native format for Windows
Media Player.

NOTES
l

l

Windows Media Video (.wmv) files can only be exported on
Windows.
Video players and editors on non-Windows systems cangenerally not open Windows Media Video (.wmv) files.

Output file

The full path and file name of the movie file to export.

BrowseOpens a dialog allowing you to browse to the desired export directory andenter the desired filename.

37Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Export Range
All

Exports all the frames in your scene.

FramesAllows you to specify the frame range to export using the two input fields to
the right. The first input field is for specifying the first frame to export, and thesecond one is for specifying the last frame to export. All the frames inbetween, including the ones specified, will be exported.

Resolution
Allows you to specify a resolution to export in, relative to your scene's actual
resolution:llResolution listlll

Width / Height

Same as Scene Resolution: Exports a movie in the same resolution as
your scene's resolution.
3/4 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 75% of the scene's widthand height.
1/2 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 50% of the scene's widthand height.
1/4 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 25% of the scene's widthand height.
Custom: Allows you specify the preferred resolution of your exported
video file, in pixels, in the Width and Height fields.

Lets you specify the width and height of video file you wish to export, in pixels.
To preserve your scene's aspect ratio, changing the value of the Width or
Height field will automatically update the other field with a proportional value.

Options
Opens the movie settings dialog box for your selected video format, in which
you can set the video and audio compression settings for your video file:
Movie OptionslQuickTime Movie (*.mov) on Windows: ,lQuickTime Movie (*.mov) on macOS:lWindows Media Video (*.wmv):

38

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box
The Export to Sprite Sheets Publish for Game Engine window exports to multiple resolutions, generating
multiple .xml files and one or multiple sprites sheets depending how many sprite resolutions you defined.
This saves different animations of the same character into the same name. For example, if there's an idle, run,and jump animation, these should all share the same Asset Name. You can think of it as the overall collectionof animations. Inside are the different saved scene versions whose drawings you can reuse for all theanimations in that character set. Each scene version will be displayed as an item in the list.
When you export an animation, only the drawings used in that scene are exported. All the drawings areexported individually first and then atlased together into a sprite sheet.
If you saved multiple animations to the same Asset Name (i.e. SpaceDuck: run, idle), then it will re-atlas the
sprite sheet to include all the drawings from all the animations in that folder, creating a new animation file, but
reusing the same skeleton.

How to access the Export to Sprite Sheets window
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

39

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

2. Click the Export to Sprite Sheets

Parameter

button.

Description

Select Directory
Asset Path

The folder path where you want to save your export.

Asset Name

The folder name in which you will save your export. This will also be the name ofyour asset in Unity. Your scene file name will be used as the clip name.

Existing Clips in Folder

Preview Window

Displays a list of pre-existing clips in the same export folder location, most likely
exported there from a previous time.

Use Scene Markers to
Export Clips

Uses scene markers to define the export range, instead of exporting the entire
scene.

Project Settings

Unit Scale

Lets you change the scale when exporting to Unity to accommodate the size ofthe export without it affecting the Harmony scene. This helps you resize assets
properly for Unity without having to resize them in Harmony. The basic scale is
one Animation Field for one Unity unit.

PresetLets you select the unit conversion from Harmony to Unity, by selecting one of 4
presets. Note: a field is a unit of measure in traditional animation grid.

Sprite Sheet

Max Width

This is a value, in pixels, for the maximum width and height the exported sprite
sheet should be. By default, both values are set to 2048 pixels.

40

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Max Height

Makes linear values for interpolation. This increases the amount of memory used
but frees up the calculation so it is not done on the fly.

Expand Sprite Sheet

Uses the minimum size necessary up until it reaches the maximum resolution.

Fixed Sprite Sheet

Creates a texture of the specified size (Max Width and Max Height) even if it does
not fill it up completely by all the drawings in your scene.
POT: Exports to sprite sheets with sizes that are a power of 2. For example: 1024

Resolution Type

Reuse Frames

x 1024. This is optimized for many graphics cards, but consumes more memory.
NPOT: Some game engines are optimized specifically to render to non powers of
two, so that it will avoid those numbers. Example: 1000 x 1000.
This option works in tandem with the Threshold option. The export will compare
the drawings in your project to reuse a maximum of similar drawings and reduce
the amount of information found in the sprite sheet, making it lighter. The export
will omit the creation of new drawings if the difference is less than the thresholdpercentage.
Calculates the differences between multiple drawings. A 2% threshold will
prevent the creation of a new drawing if the drawing is too similar to an existingThresholddrawing. For instance, with a 2% threshold, and my drawing is 100 pixels big,
only 2 of those pixels need to be different from my other drawing in order tocreate a new one. The higher the threshold, the fewer similar drawings you willhave.

Sprite Resolutions

Size of the render of the individual sprite, when it exports each drawing out.

Palettes

Allows you to exclude certain palettes that you don’t want included in yourexported file, This will cover all possible variations of palettes that will result indifferent colours showing on the character

Delete Existing Clips

Select this option to delete any pre-existing clips in the export location.

Bake Animation Curves

Makes linear values for interpolation. This increases the amount of memory used
but frees up the calculation so it is not done on the fly.

Clear Texture Folder

Removes any information from the texture folder within the Harmony file. This
has no incidence towards the Unity export but contributes to a lighter Harmony
file.

41

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Export Sprites Individually

Exports each drawing separately instead of putting them inside a spritesheet.
This allows the game engine to deal with sprite sheets or sprite atlases at theimport.

Encode to TBG

Zips the XML files to the TBG custom file format so that they may be imported to
Unity with Unity custom importers. When the files are imported, they will betreated like any asset in Unity and will contain sub-assets for textures, sprites,
and animations. This improves the ergonomics of creating and moving character
data and checking changes into source control.

42

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Extend Exposure Dialog Box
The Extend Exposure dialog box lets you extend the exposure of a selected cell in the Timeline or Xsheet.

How to access the Extend Exposure dialog box
1. Select a cell and do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Extend Exposure.

lPress F5.

The Extend Exposure dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description
Lets you enter the frame up to which you want to extend the exposure. You can

Extend to Frame

expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings that were originally
there or move the subsequent frames forward in time.

Overwrite

Lets you expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings that wereorginally there.

InsertLets you expose the drawing in the frames and move the subsequent frames
forward in the Timeline view.

43Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Import Images Dialog Box
T-HFND-007-011
The Import Images dialog box lets you import bitmap images and vectorize them, making the images editable.
Then you can use a variety of drawing tools to edit the image. Or you can always keep the original bitmap
image as is.
Also, you can choose to import bitmap images on bitmap or vector layers depending on your project.

How to open the Import Images dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select File > Import > Images.

l

In the File toolbar, click the Import Imagesl

In the Xsheet view, right-click anywhere in the frame area and select Import >button.

Images.
The Import Images dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Files
BrowseLets you find and select images on your computer.

Create Layers(s)Create layers for imported images.

Create Single Layer
Named

Creates a new layer with the specified name and imports the images into it.

Create Layer(s)Based on Filenames

Creates a layer based on each unique filename prefix. For example, if you import
three files named a-1.tga, a-2.tga and b-1.tga, this will create two layers, one
named "a" and one named "b". Layer "a" will contain the two first images and "b"will contain the third one.

Add to Existing Layer

Imports the images into the specified layer. Note that you can only import intolayers that are compatible with your import options. For example, if you're
importing images as vector drawings, you can only import them into vector

Layer

44

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

drawing layers.
Vectorization
Vectorize Image

Imports a drawing and converts it to a Toon Boom vector drawing.

ColourImports bitmaps as vector objects with their image as a bitmap texture. The
resulting drawing can be drawn or erased over, but not repainted or tweaked.

Black and White

Vectorizes drawings with a solid black line. This creates a 100% vector-based
drawing and paints it with the Vectorized Line colour swatch from your scene's
palette.

Threshold

Determines what values in the scanned image will be considered as part of thedrawing, and what will be ignored and eliminated in the vectorized drawing. The
lower the value, the darker the image and vice versa.

SmoothDetermines how smooth the lines will be. The lower the value, the more detailwill be retained. The higher the value, the more polished and easy to edit the lines
will be.

45

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Marker Dialog Box
The Timeline Scene Marker dialog box lets you create and manage scene markers in the Timeline view.

Scene markers are visual indicators displayed at the top of the Timeline view in the frame counter area. You
can use it to denote anything relevant to your work. You can indicate the frames you want to clean up, achange in action, an impact, or where you intend to apply an effect. You can also add a note to a scene marker.
If you hold the mouse cursor over a scene marker, its name, starting frame, duration and note will be displayedin the tool tip box.

How to access the Timeline Scene Marker dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, do one of the following:l

If you want to create a scene marker at a single frame, select that frame on any layer.

l

If you want to create a scene marker that spans over several frames, select this range offrame on any layer.

2. Right-click on the ruler at the top of the Timeline view and, in the context menu, select Scene
Markers > Create Scene Marker.

46

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

NOTE
If your scene already contains scene markers, you can also open this dialog box by clicking ona scene marker to select it, then right-clicking anywhere on the timeline ruler and selecting
Scene Markers > Edit in the contextual menu.

Parameter

Description

Name

The name of the marker.

Time

The frame number at which the marker starts.
The amount of frames during which the marker spans.

Duration

TIP
You can set the duration to zero to make a marker that just points at thestarting frame.

ColourAllows you to select a colour for the scene marker.

Note

Allows you to type a description for the scene marker.

47

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Mini Playback Dialog Box
The Mini Playback dialog box alllows you to configure and start Mini Playback. Mini Playback allows you toquickly preview a short span of animation starting a few frames before the current frame and ending a few
frames after the current frame, at a customizable frame rate.

How to access the Mini Playback dialog
1. Do one of the following:

Icon

l

In the top menu, select Play > Mini Playback.

l

In the Mini Playback toolbar, click on the

Mini Playback Dialog button.

Parameter

Description

Frame Rate

The speed at which Mini Playback should play your animation. By default, it is
set to Same as Scene to play at the same pace as your scene's frame rate.
Otherwise, you can choose among a set of commonly used frame rates.

Before

The amount of frames before the current frame at which to start Mini Playback.

Play

Starts Mini Playback. Playback will start at the amount of frames in the Before
field before the current frame, and end at the amount of frames in the After
field after the current frame, at the frame rate in the Frame Rate drop-down.

After

The amount of frames after the current frame at which to end Mini Playback.

48

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Movie Options Dialog Box (macOS)
The Movie Options dialog box allows you to configure the video and audio settings when exporting a movie in
QuickTime Movie (.mov) format on macOS.

NOTES
l

For tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

How to access the Movie Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

49

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description

Video
Allows you to select which algorithm to use to compress the video data. The following
video codecs are supported:
Codec

l

l

H.264 Legacy: A very effective lossy compression algorithm that is commonly
supported by web browsers and media players.
H.265 Legacy: Same compression quality as H.264, but with a smaller compression

50Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

size. This is useful for videos intended for the web and mobile devices. Not
supported on all major browsers or operating systems.
llApple ProRes 422 Legacy: A nearly lossless compression algorithm commonlyused for video editing on Apple systems. This codec is optimized for preserving
video quality, but not for publishing or streaming.
Apple ProRes 422 HQ Legacy: Preserves visual quality at the same high level asApple ProRes 4444 but for 4:2:2 image sources (cleaner footage for things likegreen screening). Heavier than Apple ProRes 422 for real-time editing performance.

l

l

l

Apple ProRes 422 LT Legacy: A more highly compressed codec than Apple ProRes
422, with roughly 70 percent of the data rate and 30 percent smaller file sizes. This
codec is perfect for environments with limited storage capacity and data rates.
Apple ProRes 422 Proxy Legacy: An even more highly compressed codec thanApple ProRes 422 LT, intended for use in offline workflows that require low data
rates but full-resolution video.
Apple ProRes 4444 Legacy: A nearly lossless compression algorithm commonlyused for video editing on Apple systems. Compared to Apple ProRes 422, this codec
preserves more colour detail and supports transparency. However, it results inheavier file sizes.

Check this option if you want to export a video with transparency.

Alpha

NOTE
This option is only available when exporting with the Apple ProRes 4444 codec. Other
codecs do not support transparency.

Sound

Uncheck this checkbox if you want to export a movie without an audio track.
Allows you to select the sample rate, or frequency, in which to export the audio track for themovie.

Rate

NOTE
Harmony cannot export audio at a higher sample rate than 22.050 kHz. If you select ahigher sample rate, your project's audio will be upsampled, which means it will takemore disc space without increasing in quality.

Use

Allows you to select whether to export the movie's audio track using the Mono or Stereo
channel mode.

51

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

NOTE
Stereo sound has a separate track for the left and right speakers, whereas mono soundonly has a single audio track for all speakers.

52

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The Movie Settings dialog box allows you to configure the video and audio compression settings whenexporting a QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTES
l

For tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

lThis dialog can only be accessed on Windows and requires Apple QuickTime to be installed.

How to access the QuickTime Movie Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

53

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description

Video

Settings

Opens the Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box. This is where you
can set the video compression settings for the movie you will export—see
QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box (Windows) on page92.

54

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

FilterOpens the Choose Video Filter dialog box, where you can select from a range offilters to apply to your video export.

Size

Opens the Export Size Settings dialog box. This dialog is available because of theway the Apple QuickTime interface is designed, but its settings are not taken inaccount by Harmony. The size of the exported video is determined by Harmony.

Settings

Opens the Sound Settings dialog box. This is where you can you set the soundcompression settings for the movie you will export—see QuickTime Sound
Settings Dialog Box (Windows) on page 89.

Sound

If this option is enabled, the video will be optimized to start playing while it isdownloading, as videos do in web browsers and web-based streaming
applications.
lPrepare for Internet
Streamingll

Fast Start: The video plays as soon as enough data required to start
playback has been downloaded.
Fast Start - Compressed Header: Same as Fast Start, except the header
is compressed for an even faster start. Requires QuickTime 3.0 or later.
Hinted Streaming: Allows you to optimize the movie file for streaming
through QuickTime Server Software. Click on the Settings button toconfigure how hints are created in your movie file.

55

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

New Scene Dialog Box
The New Scene window lets you create a new scene.

How to access the New Scene window
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select File > New.

l

In the File toolbar, click the NewlPress Ctrl + N (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + N (macOS).

button.

The New Scene dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you type in a name for the new scene.

Location

Lists the locations you used most frequently for storing scenes.

BrowseOpens a browser in which you can specify a location for the new scene thatis not listed in the Location list.

56

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Camera Size

Opens a list of resolutions.

+ (Create Custom
Resolution)

Opens the New Resolution window in which you can create a custom
resolution that is added to the Camera Size list.

- (Delete Custom Resolution)

Lets you remove a custom resolution from the Camera Size list.

Width

Indicates the width of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size list.

Frame Rate

Indicates the frame rate of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size
list.

57

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Paste Preset Dialog Box
When pasting key frames and exposures, you can modify the existing presets to your liking. There are threepresets you can modify: the default presets for both key frames and exposures, key frames only and exposures
only.

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing
files will not be created.

Add/Remove
Exposure

Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures to a
drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with the same
name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.

Enforce Key Exposure

If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings, they are preserved when
pasting. No key exposures are added. This is the default behavior when pasting.

Fill Gap with Previous
Drawing

Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.

Fill to Next Key
Exposure

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

58

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Keyframes
Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.
Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the newframe.

Add/Remove

Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.

Keyframes
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.
Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.

59

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Paste Special Dialog Box
The Paste Special dialog box lets you determine how templates and symbols are imported in the Timelineview.
When you import a template in the Timeline view, all layers are created as well as drawings and keyframes.
You can choose to import only the keyframes without the drawings or import only the drawings that are notalready in your layers. You can adjust the behaviour using the Paste Special dialog box.When you import asymbol in your scene, its full length is exposed by default. If you import a symbol in the Timeline view’s left
side, all the frames will be exposed. However, if you import it into an existing layer, you can use the Paste
Special dialog box to adjust the import behaviour to fit your requirements.Once you set the parameters,
Harmony will reuse them each time you import a symbol in the Timeline view’s right side until you set newparameters.

How to access the Paste Special dialog box
1. In the Library view, select the symbol or template to import.
2. Do one of the following:lWhile holding down the Alt key, click and drag on the template, then drop it on the Timelineview, over the layer and at the frame where you want to paste it.

lPress Ctrl + C (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + C (macOS). Then, in the Timeline view, click on theframe where you want to paste the template and press Ctrl + B (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + B(macOS)

The Paste Special dialog box opens.

60Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Do Nothing

Does not create or overwrite drawings.
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing
files will not be created.
Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures to a
drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with the same
name do not already exist in the destination.

Add/Remove
Exposure

Replace existing drawings. Create drawing files when they do not exist:
Replace drawings with the same names to update a scene with new modified
drawings and preserve the animation.
Tip: If you don't want to lose the existing animation when pastinga template, such as when placing new drawings after the
animation, then delete the template's animation. It will still haveupdated the drawings but not override the existing animation.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.

Symbols
Copy symbols if they
do not exist

This is the default setting for this operation and will prevent Symbols in an Action
template from being copied.

Duplicate symbols

Creates a duplicate of the symbol instead of linking the Symbol instance to theoriginal one. The new Symbol is created in the Library.

Paste all Frames ofthe symbol (fullmovie)

When enabled, the Paste Special command exposes all the symbol's frames
instead of only the first one.

Add Remove/Keyframes
MotionCopies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.

61

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Velocity

Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the new frame.

Rotation

Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the new frame.

Scale

Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.

Skew

Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.

Force Keyframes at
Function's Beginningand EndAdds a keyframe to the beginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing thesource function.

CyclesNormal (forward): Pastes your selection as is, starting with the first cell andending with the last.
Reverse: Pastes your selection in reverse, starting with the last cell and ending
with the first.
Cycle Type
Forward > Reverse: Pastes your selection as a yo-yo, starting with the firstcell, going to the last one and ending with the first cell.
Reverse > Forward: Pastes your selection as a reverse yo-yo, starting with thelast cell, going to the first one and ending with the last cell.
Number of Cycles

Lets you set the number of cycles.

62

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Pen Pressure Feel Dialog Box
The Pen Pressure Feel dialog box allows you to configure how Harmony processes the pressure you put on
your tablet pen to apply it to the size of your drawing tool.

By default, Harmony applies the pressure you put on your pen to your tool in a linear fashion. That is, if you put
25% of the maximum pressure on your pen, your tool's size will be 25% of the way between its minimum andmaximum size. If you put 75% of the maximum pressure on your pen, your tool's size will be 75% of the way
between its minimum and maximum size.
However, you may find that it would feel more natural, or that it would make it easier to control the size ofyour drawing strokes, if Harmony interpreted the pressure you put on your pen differently. For example, you
may want Harmony to make your brush strokes small unless you put a lot of pressure on your pen, or you may
want Harmony to make your brush strokes big unless you put very little pressure on your pen. This is where
the Pen Pressure Feel dialog box comes in handy.
NOTE
For information on how to use the Pen Pressure Feel dialog, refer to the User Guide.

How to access the Pen Pressure Feel dialog
1. Add the Pen Settings toolbar to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Pen Settings.

lRight-click on any existing toolbar and, in the context menu, select Pen Settings.

2. In the Pen Settings toolbar, click on the

Pen Pressure Feel button.

The Pen Pressure Feel dialog appears.

63Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

The percentage of your pen's maximum pressure you must apply before Harmony registers
that you are drawing. If you increase this setting, you can lightly brush your tablet with yourpen without drawing, and you must apply a certain amount of pressure on it to draw.
Min Pressure

For example, if you set this to 15%, you can apply up to 15% of your pen's maximum pressure
without actually drawing. If you apply exactly 15% of your pen's maximum pressure, Harmony
will draw a stroke in your tool's minimum size.
By default, this is set to 0%, which means that just brushing the tablet with your pen will draw
in your tool's minimum size. You can increase this setting up to 25%.

Curve Preset

Allows you to instantly apply a curve preset to the pressure curve below.
The percentage of your pen's maximum pressure at which point your drawing tool should draw
in its maximum size.

Max Pressure

For example, if you set this to 80%, your drawing tool will draw in its maximum size if you
apply 80% of your tablet pen's maximum pressure.
By default, this is set to 100%, which means you have to press your tablet pen all the way todraw in your drawing tool's maximum size. You can decrease this setting down to 75%.
This curve determines how to process the amount of pressure you apply to your tablet pen into
your drawing tool's size.
By default, it is linear, meaning that the amount of pressure you put on your tablet pen is
directly applied to the size of your drawing tool. By moving the two Bezier handles between
the extremities of the curve, you can change the curve's shape.
l

If you make an ease-in curve like the one below, the size of your drawing strokes willtend to be closer to the minimum size of your drawing tool, unless you apply a lot ofpressure on your tablet pen.

Pressure Curvel

If you make an ease-out curve like the one below, the size of your drawing strokes willtend to be closer to the maximum size of your drawing tool, unless you apply very little
pressure on your tablet pen.

64

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Descriptionll

If you make an ease-in-ease-out curve like the one below, the size of your drawing
strokes will tend to be closer to the minimum size of your drawing tool when applying
light pressure, and to be closer to the maximum size of your drawing tool when
applying more pressure, but it will rarely be the median between the minimum and the
maximum size.

If you make an ease-out-ease-in curve like the one below, the size of your drawing
strokes will tend to be closer to median between the minimum and maximum size ofyour drawing tool, unless you apply very little or a lot of pressure on your tablet pen.

65

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Preferences Dialog Box
The Preferences dialog box allows you to adjust preferences to suit your workflow and your production's
needs.

NOTE
For a list of all the preferences as well as their functionality, refer to the Preferences guide.

How to open the Preferences dialog box
1. Do one of the following:llWindows:l

In the top menu, select Edit > Preferences.

l

Press Ctrl + U.

macOS:l

In the top menu, select Harmony Essentials > Preferences.

l

Press ⌘ + U.

66

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

This drop-down allows you to select among one of the available preference presets.
The different preference presets have a lot of settings in common. The following table lists how eachpreset differs for specific preferences:
Preference Set
Tab /Location

Preferenc
e Set
GeneralPencilTool
Properties

Preference

BasicCompositing

CutoutAnimationPaperless
Animation

Rigging

Focus on
Mouse
Enter

Off

On

On

On

On

Default
Separate
Positionfor Pegs

Off

Off

On

Off

On

StopMotion
Keyframe
s

Off

Off

On

Off

On

Auto
Close Gap

On

On

On

On

Off

Save...

Allows you to export your current preference settings as an XML file, which you can import later.

Load...

Allows you to browse for and import a preference file that was exported with the Save... button.
Where you can browse for and change preferences.

Preference TabsNOTE
For a list of all the preferences as well as their functionality, refer to the Preferences guide.

67

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

RestoreAll
Defaults

Restores all your preferences to their default setting for the selected preference set.

OK

Commits your changes to the preferences and closes the dialog.

CancelUndoes your changes to the preferences and closes the dialog.

68Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Recolour Drawings Dialog Box
The Recolour Drawing dialog box allows you to replace all instances of a colour or texture in drawings with adifferent colour or texture swatch in one of the scene's palettes. This replaces the colours or textures in thedrawings without requiring you to modify the palettes. You can use this dialog to perform colour replacementin the current drawing, in all the drawings in one or several layers or in all drawings in your scene.
This dialog will replace the colour or texture that is currently selected in the Colour view with the colour or
texture that you select inside the dialog.

How to access the Recolour Drawings dialog
1. In the Colour view, select the colour or texture swatch you want to replace by doing one of thefollowing:lSelect the palette in which the colour or texture swatch is located, then select the swatch
you wish to replace.

l

If the drawing in the Camera or Drawing view contains the colour or texture you want toreplace, select the Colour Eyedropper

tool in the Tools toolbar, then click on that colour

or texture in the drawing. The Colour view will automatically select that colour or texture's
palette as well as that colour or texture's swatch.

69

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

2. Do one of the following:l

Right-click on the swatches list, then select Recolour Drawings.

lOpen the Colour view menu

Parameter, then select Colours > Recolour Drawings.

Description
Allows you to select which drawings will be affected by the colour replacement:ll

Replace Colour In

Current drawing: Replaces the selected colour in the currently selecteddrawing only.
All drawings in the currently selected layers: Replaces the selectedcolour in all the drawings in the layer that is currently selected in theTimelime or Xsheet Timeline view.

NOTE
This option can work with several drawing layers selected.

lReplacement Colour

All drawings in the scene: Replaces the selected colour in every drawing
in the current scene.

Allows you to select the palette and colour or texture swatch to replace theselected colour or texture with.

70Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Remove Frames Dialog Box
The Add Frames dialog box allows you to remove a range of frames from your scene. All the keyframes andthe exposed drawings in the removed range will be deleted, and the keyframes and exposed drawings after
the removed range will be offset backwards, so as to close the gap.

How to access the Remove Frames dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a frame or a range of frames.

2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Scene > Frame > Remove Selected Frames.

l

In the Xsheet view, right-click and select Frame > Remove Selected Frames.

The Add Frames dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Number of frames to remove

The amount of frames to remove. The range of frame that will be removed starts
from the selected frame—or the first selected frame, if a range of frames isselected—and ends after the selected number of frames.

71Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

By default, this is set to the amount of selected frames.

Ripple Scene Markers

If checked, scene markers after the removed frames will be offset backward toremain synchronized with the keyframes and drawings in your scene. If
unchecked, scene markers will remain in place while everything else after theremoved frames is offset.

72

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Scene Settings Dialog Box
The Scene Settings dialog box lets you select settings for the resolution of your scene.
You are already required to select resolution settings when creating a scene, but those settings can also be
modified later using the Scene Settings dialog box.

How to access the Scene Settings dialog box
1. In the top menu, select Scene > Scene Settings.
The Scene Settings dialog box opens.

Resolution Tab

The resolution tab allows you to set the width and height of your scene in pixels as well as whether the angleof the field of view.
Icon

Parameter

Description

You can select your project’s resolution (camera frame size) fromthis preset list.
Resolution Presetsl

HDTV_1080p24: The standard definition for high definition
television at 24 frames per second, mostly used in theAmericas and some Asian countries that used the NTSC
standard for analogue television.

73

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Icon

Parameter

Descriptionll

HDTV_1080p25: The standard definition for high definition
television at 25 frames per second, usually for broadcastingin European, African, Asian and Australian countries thatused the PAL or SECAM standard for analogue television.
HDTV_1080p23.976: The standard definition for highdefinition television at 23.976 frames per second. This isuseful if the remainder of your pipeline uses the 23.976
framerate for legacy reasons.

l

l

l

l

l

l

HDTV_720p24: The former standard high definition
resolution at 24 frames per second.
film-2K: A standard HD format for film projectors with a low
aspect ratio.
film-1.33_H: The standard resolution for the academy film
format that conforms to the standard 4:3 aspect ratio.
film-1.66_H: The standard resolution for widescreen film
format that conforms to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
film-1.66_V: The standard resolution for widescreen film
format, but with a vertical field of view.
NTSC: The standard resolution and framerate for analogue
standard definition televisions in most of the Americas(except Brazil, Paraguay, Uruguay and Argentina), Japan,
Taiwan, South Korea, the Philippines and Myanmar.

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

PAL: The standard resolution and framerate for analogue
standard definition televisions in Europe, Africa, Australia,
most of Asia, Brazil, Uruguay and Argentina.
720p-240p: A series of standard widescreen presets named
after their resolution heights.
low: A resolution based on NTSC with half of its standard
dimensions.
Web_Video: A legacy format for web streaming.
Game_512: A preset for the gaming pipeline, with a squarecanvas.
HDTV: The standard definition for high definition television
at 24 frames per second, with a horizontal fit field of view.
HDTV_Vertical: The standard definition for high definition
television at 24 frames per second, with a vertical fit field of
view.

74

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Parameter

Description

Selected Resolution Preset

Displays the name of the selected resolution preset just below thepresets list. If you have made any changes to the resolution sinceselecting a preset, this will display "(custom)".

Save Resolution Setting

Allows you to save the current resolution settings as a new preset. If
you have a resolution preset selected, this button is only available if
you have made changes to the resolution since selecting the preset.
You will be prompted to type in the name of the new resolution
preset.

Resolution

The resolution of the scene defines the width and height of thecanvas in pixels. By default, the scene will be rendered in thisresolution.

Scene Width

The width of the resolution for the scene, in pixels.

Scene Height

The width of the resolution for the scene, in pixels.

Aspect Ratio

Displays the ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of
the scene. For example, if the scene width and height are the samevalue, this ratio equals 1. The standard aspect ratio for widescreen
televisions is 1.777. For legacy displays, it is 1.333.
The angle of the field of view, which determines the size of thecamera cone as well as the way the field grid used to position
elements is adjusted to fit the scene.
lField of ViewlHorizontal Fit: The field of view is automatically adjusted sothat the field grid and camera cone fit the horizontal lengthof the scene.
Vertical Fit: The field of view is automatically adjusted sothat the field grid and camera cone fits the vertical length of
the scene.

75

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Icon

Parameter

Description

NOTE
Objects in Harmony are positioned in fields, based on a
traditional animation grid which extends to 12 fields from thecenter in each direction, and which has 4:3 proportions bydefault. In a scene with 4:3 proportions, this grid fits thecamera field perfectly. However, since most scenes have an
aspect ratio of 16:9, the grid does not fit the camera field
perfectly. If the field of view is Horizontal Fit, the grid's width
will match the scene's width, but will extend beyond its
vertical edges. If the field of view is Vertical Fit, the grid's
height will match the scene's height, will not extends to its
horizontal edges.

The amount of animation frames to play each second. Increasing the
FPS will make your animation play faster, and decreasing it will
make it play slower.
llPreset: Allows you to select a frame rate for your scene
among one of many commonly used preset frame rates.
FPS:Allows you to type in the frame rate for your scene.

Frame RateNOTE
The standard framerate for film production is 24 frames per
second. However, televisions in some countries play at 25
frames per second. Some productions may use 23.976
frames per second to preserve compatibility with legacy
standard displays.

76Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Scripts Manager Dialog Box
The Scripts Manager dialog allows you to create buttons in the Scripting toolbar. Each button you create canrun a specific function in one of your scripts. You can also choose an icon and a tool tip for the button, if you
want.

NOTE
For tasks related to this dialog box, see the User Guide.

How to access the Scripts Manager Dialog Box
1. Add the Scripting toolbar to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Scripting.

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click on theManage Scripts button.

The Scripts Manager dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Files

A list of the available JavaScript files.

77

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Functions

A list of the available functions for the selected script.

In Toolbar

The list of script functions already added to the Scripting toolbar.
Runs the selected function.

ExecuteTIP
Press Esc to interrupt the execution of the script.

Customize Icon

Allows you to select an icon for the toolbar button. Clicking on this button will
open an Open dialog prompting you to browse for and select a .png, .jpg, .xpm
or .svg file.

Customize Tooltip

Allows you to type in a custom tooltip for the toolbar button.

78

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Select Colour Dialog Box
The Select Colour dialog box lets you set the colour of layers and columns. Using colours for layers andcolumns helps to differentiate them visually, making them easy to identify.
You can select a colour by choosing from a basic set of colours, using the colour wheel or by specifying theHSV or RGB values. Once you have selected a colour, you can adjust its intensity and save it as a custom
colour that you can reuse.

How to access the Select Colour dialog box in the Timeline view
1. In the Timeline view, click the Change Track Colour

button of the layer you want to modify.

The Select Colour dialog box opens.

How to access the Select Colour dialog box in the Xsheet view
1. In the Xsheet view, select one or more columns to modify.
2. Right-click on the column’s header and select Colour > Change Columns Colour.
The Select Colour dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Basic colours

A basic set of colours to choose from.

79

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Custom colours

Displays the custom colours you previously stored using the Add to Custom
Colours button.

Add to custom colours

Lets you add the selected colour to the Custom colours list above.

Colour wheel

Lets you select a colour by dragging the T-shaped pointer.

Value slider

Once you select a colour, you can drag the slider to change the intensity and see it
previewed in the Colour Preview window below..

Colour Preview

Displays the colour you are currently selecting. To apply the colour, click OK.

Hue, Saturation, Value

Lets you set the hue (colour), saturation (amount of colour) and brightness (value)of the colour.

Red, Green, Blue

Lets you set the red, green and blue values.

80Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box
The Edit Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box lets you apply ease to multiple functions and keyframes.
You can display the function curve and modify the Bezier or Ease curve.

How to access the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select a keyframe on one or more layers.

2. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, right-click and select Set Ease For Multiple Parameters.

l

In the Timeline toolbar, click the Set Ease For Multiple Parameters

button.

The Set Ease For Multiple Parameters dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Filters

MotionMotion: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Position X, Position Y,
Position Z and 3D Path functions.
Rotation: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Angle functions.

81

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Scale: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Scale functions.
Skew: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Skew functions.
Morphing: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Morphing Velocity
functions. Note that it applies to the Morphing velocity function found in the Layer
Properties window, not the basic morphing ease in the Tool Properties view.
Other: Applies the easing parameters to all the other the selected functions, suchas all functions created to animate effect parameters.

Left and Right Time Ratio

Lets you type the percentage value corresponding to the length of time you want
the easing to last. Stay between 0% and 100%. If you go beyond 100%, yourmotion will overshoot.

Left and Right Value Ratio

Lets you type the percentage value of how strong you want the easing out to be.
Stay between 0% and 100%. If you go beyond 100%, your motion will overshoot.

Apply/Previous

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes and then selects theprevious keyframe in the timeline.

Apply

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes.

Apply/Next

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes and then selects thenext keyframe in the timeline.

Close

Close the dialog box. If you did not apply the modifications, they will becancelled.

82

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Set Ease on Keyframes Dialog Box
The Set Ease on Keyframes dialog box allows you to quickly change the percentage of ease before and after aselection of keyframes.

This dialog box is designed to quickly adjust the “time ratio” of the ease on your animations. To give you abetter idea of its effect, select a keyframe and open the Set Ease for Multiple Paramters dialog box. This dialog
box allows you to adjust the ease of your animations using Bezier handles. Moving the Bezier handle laterally
changes the time ratio of the ease, and moving it vertically changes its value ratio.

How to access the Set Ease on Keyframes dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select one or several animation keyframes.
2. In the Timeline toolbar, click on the

Set Ease on Selected Keyframes button.

The Set Ease on Keyframes dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Allows you to adjust the ease left of the selected keyframes.
Ease In (left)l

If the checkbox is unchecked, the ease left of the selected keyframes will beunchanged.

83

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Descriptionl

If the checkbox is checked, the ease left of the selected keyframes will be set to thepercentage in the input-field right of the checkbox.

Allows you to adjust the ease right of the selected keyframes.
lEase Out (right)l

If the checkbox is unchecked, the ease right of the selected keyframes will beunchanged.
If the checkbox is checked, the ease right of the selected keyframes will be set to thepercentage in the input-field right of the checkbox.

OK

Applies the selected changes and closes the dialog box.

CancelCloses the dialog box without making any changes.

84Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Sound Element Editor Dialog Box
When you double-click on a sound layer in the Timeline view, the Sound Element Editor appears.

How to access the Sound Element Editor dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In Xsheet view, select the Sound column.

lIn the Layer Properties view, select Sound Editor.

lDouble-click on a sound layer in the Timeline view.

Parameter

Description

Mute/Unmute

This button mutes and unmutes the sound layer during the scene play back.

Layer Name

This field displays the layer's name.

Sound Editor

This button opens the Sound editor.

Start Frame/End Frame

These fields determine the start and end frame of the sound file.

DetectThis button launches the automated lip-sync detection.

85

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

MapThis button opens the Map Lip-sync dialog box.

Mouth Shapes: This section shows the automated lip-sync detection during the scene playback. Click on the thumbnail image of each mouth to change the phoneme
assigned to the current frame.

86Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

OpenQuickTime Sound Options Dialog Box (GNU/Linux)
The OpenQuickTime Sound Options dialog box (titled MediaSettings) allows you to configure the audio
compression settings when exporting a QuickTime movie on Linux.

On GNU/Linux, Harmony uses the OpenQuickTime framework to export QuickTime movies. This frameworkuses its own user interfaces to allow you to configure the video and audio compression settings for a movie.
Because OpenQuickTime only comes bundled with non-prorprietary codecs, its compression options arelimited.
NOTESlFor tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

lThis dialog can only be accessed on GNU/Linux.

How to access the OpenQuickTime Sound Options dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).

87

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description
Lets you select a codec. By default, the following codecs will be available:
l

l

l

codec

l

l

A-Law 2:1: This codec uses logarithms to compress audio data. The
resulting audio stream requires half the disk space of uncompressed audio
data, but is of noticeably lower quality.
IMA 4:1: This codec compresses audio data to require a quarter of the disk
space required for uncompressed audio data. It is not supported by a lot ofsoftware.
Twos Complement - Little Endian PCM: A standard uncompressed audio
codec.
Twos Complement - Big Endian PCM: A legacy standard uncompressedaudio codec. This codec may be compatible with older editing interfaces.
(mu)-Law 2:1: Similarly to A-Law, this codec uses logarithms tocompress audio data. The resulting audio stream requires half the disk
space of uncompressed audio data, but is of noticeably lower quality.

NOTE
It is recommended to leave this option to its default value, Twos
Complement - Little Endian PCM, as it is commonly used for storing
uncompressed audio. Other encoding formats are likely to sacrifice audio
quality for negligible savings in disk space.

Sample rate

The sample rate at which to export your scene's audio. The only available option
is 22050 Hz, as it is the sample rate used internally by Harmony.

88Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The Sound Settings dialog box allows you to set the audio compression settings when you want to export a
QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTES
l

For tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

lThis dialog can only be accessed on Windows and requires Apple QuickTime to be installed.

How to access the QuickTime Sound Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

89Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description

Allows you to select the compression algorithm to use the compress the movie'saudio track.
Compressor

NOTE
It is recommended to leave this setting to None, as other formats are likely
to sacrifice audio quality for negligible savings in disk space.

Allows you to select the sample rate, or frequency, in which to export the audio
track for the movie.

Rate

NOTE
Harmony cannot export audio at a higher sample rate than 22.050 kHz. If
you select a higher sample rate, your project's audio will be upsampled,which means it will take more disc space without increasing in quality.

Allows you to select the bit depth in which to encode the audio track. This
determines the amount of precision to record each wavelength in the audio track.

Size

NOTE
The standard bit depth is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk
space the audio track of your movie file requires will be halved, but theaudio quality will be significantly lower.

Use

Allows you to select whether to export the movie's audio track using the Mono or
Stereo channel mode.

90

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

NOTE
Stereo sound has a separate track for the left and right speakers, whereas
mono sound only has a single audio track for all speakers.

91

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box(Windows)
The Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box allows you to configure the video compression settings
when exporting a QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTES
l

For tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

lThis dialog can only be accessed on Windows and requires Apple QuickTime to be installed.

How to access the QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

92Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description

Allows you to select the codec to use to compress the video stream of yourmovie. It is recommended to use one of the following codecs, depending on yourusage scenario:
Compression Typell

H.264: A very effective lossy compression algorithm that is commonly
supported by web browsers and most media players.
MPEG-4 Video: A very effective lossy compression algorithm that iscommonly supported by media players, but less so by web browsers.

93

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

DescriptionllAnimation: A high quality compression algorithm that is commonly used
for media interchange and video editing.
QuickTime ProRes Movie: A codec developed by Apple designed forhigh-quality editing in Final Cut Pro. In Harmony, The Apple ProRes 4444
and 422 codecs are available on Windows, Linux and macOS as export
formats.

NOTES
l

l

On macOS, the Apple ProRes options from previous versions arestill available for compatibility with scenes created in thoseversions. These export formats are labelled with “Legacy” inparentheses.
ProRes 4444 XQ is not supported prior to macOS Catalina (10.15)

TIPS
l

l

You can export a video with transparency by selecting the Animation
codec and setting the Depth setting to Millions of Colors+.
You can export a video with virtually lossless compression by selecting
the Animation codec and setting Quality setting to Best.

MotionFrame Rate

Key Frames

The amount of frames per second for the video stream. Leave this setting toCurrent to use your project's frame rate.
Some codecs compress the video by recording a limited amount of keyframes,
which are frames in which the entire picture is encoded, pixel by pixel and, inbetween, recording deltas, which are frames that are only defined by theirdifference with the previous frame. This significantly reduces the size of the movie
file. However, the less keyframes a movie has, the more it is likely to encounter
decoding errors, and the harder it is for players to scrub or jump to a specific timein the video. This option allows you to decide when keyframes are inserted in thevideo stream.
Automatic: Lets the encoder decide when keyframes should be inserted.
Every ... frames: Allows you to set the exact interval, in frames, at which
keyframes should be inserted.
All: Encodes every frame as a keyframe. This option will significantly impact filesize, but will make it easier to scrub through the video without causing any
rendering error.

94

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

NOTE
If you are using the H.264 codec, you must set the Key Frames option to All,or you will get an error message when you confirm the compression
settings.

Encodes frames in a different order than the one at which they are meant to be
Frame Reordering

displayed. This allows for more efficient compression, but may not be compatible
with some players.

Compressor
Allows you to set the colour depth for your video. A lower colour depth will
reduce the size of the video stream but will have significant impacts on picture
quality.
Depth

TIP
Set this to Millions of Colors+ if you want to export a video withtransparency.

Quality

Lets you choose a quality setting for the video compression. A higher quality
setting will increase the size of the movie file, but will look better. A lower quality
setting will reduce the size of the movie file, but will cause blurriness andcompression artifacts to appear in the picture.
Allows you to choose between the following scan modes:llScan Mode /Interlaced

Interlaced: Frames are encoded starting with their odd-numberedscanlines, then their even-numbered scanlines.
Progressive: Frames are encoded whole, from the highest scanline to thelowest scanline.

NOTE
Some codecs will display a drop-down allowing you to select Interlaced or
Progressive, while others will simply have an Interlaced checkbox.

Aspect Ratio

Allows you to select one of the following aspect ratios:l

4:3: For output on standard definition displays.

95

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

DescriptionlFilter

16:9: For output to widescreen displays.

When exporting with the PNG compression type, this determines the algorithmwith which each pixel is encoded relative to other pixels. Leaving this option to
Best will export in the most space-efficient filter, without compromising picture
quality. Picking a filter may increase rendering speed a bit, at the expense of somedisk space.

Data Rate
Automatic

Lets the encoder use the optimal bit rate for your compression settings.
Allows you to specify the encoding bit rate.

NOTE

Restrict To

This setting will override other compression settings, so that the specified
bit rate is respected.

Optimize the encoding to be responsive depending on the intended viewing
method:l

Optimized Forll

CD/DVD-ROM: Optimizes the bit rate for a video that will be played using
an optical disc player.
Download: Optimizes the bit rate for a file that is going to be
downloaded, then viewed from the user's hard drive.
Streaming: Optimized the bit rate for a video that will be streamed fromthe web and played as the video is being downloaded.

96Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box
You can offset, blend, or mix the colours in a colour palette using the sliders and increasing the Amount value.

How to access the Tint Offset/Blend dialog box
1. From the Colour View menu, select Palettes > Tint Panel or right-click and select Tint Panel.
The Blend/Offset Tint panel opens.

Parameter

Description

OffsetOffsets the selected colours by the adjustments made using the HSB and RGB
sliders. Use the Amount slider to adjust the degree of offset. Use the Alpha slider
to adjust the opacity of the selected colour.

Blend

Blends the selected colours with the colour swatch in the top-right corner. Use
the Amount slider to adjust the degree of blend. A blend of 100% turns theselected colours into the same colour as the swatch. Adjusting the HSB and RGB
sliders affect the swatch colour, which in turn affects the selected colours on theleft. Use the Alpha slider to adjust the opacity of the swatch.

Mixer

Select a Base and Tint colour to form a third colour swatch. Use the slider justbeneath to mix the Base and Tint colours by different amounts. This will affectthe mixed swatch whether it is selected or not. Select either the Tint or Baseswatch and use the HSB and RGB sliders to adjust its colour. This will affect themixed swatch colour, which in turn affects the selected colours on the left.

97Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box
The Toolbar Manager dialog box lets you customize the toolbar in any of the views. You can add your favourite
tools to a toolbar for an efficient workflow.

How to access the Toolbar Manager dialog box
1. Right-click on a toolbar in any view and select Customize. Note that the menu will not appear if
you right-click on a disabled icon.

Parameter

Description

Available Tools

Displays the complete list of tools available for customizing a toolbar.

Toolbar

Displays a list of the tools currently available on the toolbar.

Default

Restores the toolbar with its default items.

98Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box
The Vectorization Parameters dialog box lets you vectorize pencil drawings, along with any red, blue or green
pencil marks you may have used to indicate highlights and shadows. The drawing will be vectorized into pure
red, blue, green and black (RGB values), while creating colour art zones wherever lines connect. After painting
in your tones and highlights, change your pure RGB colours to transparent (0 Alpha) in the Colour Picker
window and watch the indicator colour zone lines disappear.

How to open the Vectorization Parameters dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Import > From Scanner.
You can also open it from any other import option that allows you to customize the vectorization
parameters (i.e. from the scanner).
2. In the Scan Drawings window, do the following:l

In the Layer section, decide on the layer options.

l

In the Import Options section, select the Convert to Toon Boom Vector Drawing
optionl

Click Preview.

3. In the Vectorization section, click the Vectorization Parameters

99

button.

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Options Tab
The Options tab contains the main vectorization settings. More settings are available in the Help tab.

Parameter

Description

Input

The input filters are applied to the bitmap image before it is vectorized.

One Pass

One threshold value is applied to both the Line and Colour Art. For drawings with
distinct vector-style lines of mattes, you only need one pass.

Two Passes

Applies a different threshold value to each layer. For greyscale drawings, you
may want to perform the vectorization process twice to apply different thresholdvalues to the Line and Colour Art layers.

Threshold

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Lineand Colour Art layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing;
0% is white and 100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

Expand Bitmap

Lets you enter a value to scale the bitmap to detect small variations in the line.
Use this option if you scanned a greyscale image and want to preserve small
variations in the texture to apply to the line art.

Jag Filter

Lets you enter a value to scale back the bitmap to remove some of the line’sroughness. This is useless when you have a drawing that appears quite rough; theJag filter will eliminate excess strokes in the final drawing.

Line Art Threshold(%)

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Line Art
layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0% is white and100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

100Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Colour Art Threshold(%)

OutputDetermines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Colour
Art layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0% is whiteand 100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.
The output filters are applied during the vectorization process.

No Colour Art

No Texture

Does not generate filling zones in the Colour Art layer.
Does not generate texture in the Line Art layer in the final images. Select thisoption to create solid lines in the final line art.

Generate Matte in
Underlay Layer

Creates an opaque zone behind your drawing’s lines to avoid seeing through thelayers.

Colour as Texture

Converts colour values into a texture layer.

Optical Registration

DPI

Peg Side

The optical registration options are used to automatically align drawings basedon the position of the peg holes on the animation paper. The peg holes must
appear in the scanned drawings for the optical registration to work.
Lets you enter the dots-per-inch value of your image. You must enter the samevalue as the DPI used to scan the image.
Lets you select the position of the peg holes on your drawings. Identify whether
they are on the top, bottom, left or right.
Determines how exact the location of the peg holes must be for the software torecognize them. There are two values to choose from:

Strictness

Strict: The peg holes must be in a tightly defined area to be recognized.
Loose: The peg holes can be recognized somewhere in a larger area. This is therecommended setting.

Field Chart
Post Processing

Lets you indicate the size of the animation paper, 12 or 16.
The Post Processing filters are applied to the final vector images.

Remove Holes

Removes holes of a specified value that might make painting difficult.

Remove Dirt

Removes stray marks and dirt of a specified value. Try a value around 500.

101

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Remove Hair Size

Removes small strokes that have no line art.

Remove Hair:
Number of Passes

The number of times the drawing will be analyzed to identify hair marks.

Miscellaneous
Close Gaps

Closes gaps in the Colour Art so you can paint it.

Smooth Passes forLine Art Before
Breaking Triangles

The number of times the smoothing operation runs before creating the triangles
that break lines in the drawing. If unnecessary triangles are appearing in thedrawing, increase this value.

Smooth Passes forLine Art

The number of times the smoothing operation is performed after the triangles
have been created. This further smooths the line art.

Preview
Show Strokes

Shows the strokes in the Vectorized Image panel.

Stroke Thickness

Shows the size of the strokes.

Help Tab
The Help tab contains the most advanced vectorization settings which you type in the Advanced Option fields
at the bottom of the Vectorization Parameters dialog box.

File IO Options-file <filename (including extension)> [ options ]102Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide-infile <filename (including extension)>; same as -file-outfile <filename>; alternate output file-informat <format>; the input format. Used if reading from stdin-debug; turn on debug mode
-noforce; don't force output if image is inconsistent-version; print version information and quit
-output_version <version>; output files of this version. Valid versions can be: 0 or 604-force_unamed_palette_for_texture; will generate a texture in TVG's internal palette

Registration Options-register <dpi side strictness>; perform optical registration.
• Side can be one of left, right, top, bottom or l, r, t, b.
• Strictness can be either loose, strict or l, s.
-register_center_peg_holes; will use only round holes in 16 fields page-rcph; short form of register_center_peg_holes-registration_looseness_factor <factor>; registration looseness factor (default 2.000000)-rlf; short form of registration_looseness_factor-rdebug; output registration debug messages-pegpitch <inch (default 8.000000)>; distance between peg bars
-threshr < (default 0.500000)>; threshold for optical registration; range 0.0 to 1.0-rmargin <inch (default 1)>; region size where to look for peg bars
-peg_distance_from_center <inch (default 5.25)>; peg distance from centre of the image-pdfc; short form of -peg_distance_from_center-out_peg_position <side (default same)>; wanted position of the peg on the drawing.
• Can be one of right, left, top, bottom (or r, l, t, b) or same.
• A rotation will be performed if it is different from the side passed to -register.
-output_peg_matrix; output the peg transformation matrix on standard output.
-scanner_calibrate; < (default 1.0000 1.0000) > x and y scale factors to be applied to scanner image.

Filtering Options-pixel <pixel_shape (default '4x3')>; Valid values: 4x3

103

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes-gap <worldUnits (default 10)>; close gaps up to this big-pencil; generate line art only
-keep_dirt; don't filter out dirt
-thresh <threshold (default 0.2)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-rmv_hairs <worldUnits (default 1)> <passes (default 1)>• remove hairs of size smaller than "size" in "passes" passes-rmv_holes <area (default 7)>; remove holes smaller than "area"-rmv_dirt <area (default 1)>; remove dirt smaller than "area"• try values between 100 and 500 for rmv_holes and rmv_dirt. The area is in world units squared-rmv_triangles <worldUnits (default 30.000000)>; remove triangles at "pixels"• distance from each other. Use -no_break to remove all triangles-no_texture; don't generate textured strokes-color_as_texture; will vectorize the alpha channel and put the RGB colour in a textured colour-noclosegap; disable all gap closing algorithms-no_break; disable the breaking of line art-jag_filter <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap-expand_bitmap <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap-fit_errorc <error (default 1.000000>; fitting error for the colour art-fit_errorl <error (default 1.000000>; fitting error for the line art-smoothl <passes (default 1>; number of smooth passes for line art-smoothc <passes (default 1>; number of smooth passes for colour art-first_smooth <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art before breaking triangles-first_smoothl <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art before breaking triangles-first_smoothc <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art in colour art pass (needs -2pass)-2pass; specify two sets of parameters; one for line art "l", one for colour art "c"(-thresh, -rmv_holes and -rmv_dirt will be overridden by -threshl, threshc, -rmv_holesl,-rmv_holesc, -rmv_dirtl and -rmv_dirtc)-threshl <threshold for line art (default 0.5)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-threshc <threshold for color art (default 0.5)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-jag_filterl <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for line art

104Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide-jag_filterc <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for colour art-expand_bitmapl <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for line art-expand_bitmapc <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for colour art-rmv_holesl <area (default 7)>; remove line art holes smaller than "area"-rmv_holesc <area (default 7)>; remove colour art holes smaller than "area"-rmv_dirtl <area (default 1)>; remove line art dirt smaller than "area"-rmv_dirtc <area (default 1)>; remove colour art dirt smaller than "area"
try values between 100 and 500 for rmv_holesl, rmv_holesc, rmv_dirtl and rmv_dirtc. The values are inworld units squared-margins <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin around bitmap-top_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at top of bitmap-bottom_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at bottom of bitmap-left_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at left of bitmap-right_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at right of bitmap-remove_peg_bars; remove the peg bar holes-field_size <fields (default 12 or use value in scan file)>; set the drawing to this field size
-fs; short hand for -field_size-peg_bar_size <inch (default 1)>; the size of the peg bar region-noframe; do not put a frame around the colour art-frame_fields <default -1.000000>; put a frame of the specified dimension around the colour art-downscale_input <default 1>; downscale the raw input by this integer factor-downscale_texture <default 1>; downscale the output texture by this integer factor-buildmatte; generate a matte on underlay for line test
-buildmatte_colourart; generate a matte on colour art for line test
NOTE
-buildmatte and -buildmatte_colourart are mutually exclusive-copystrokes; copy original strokes when building matte.

Options for bitmap that has no registration information-pixel_margins <inch (default 0)>; remove margin around bitmap

105

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes-top_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at top of bitmap-bottom_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at bottom of bitmap-left_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at left of bitmap-right_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at right of bitmap-dpi <(default -1)>; dpi information of input bitmap

RGB Keying Options-rgb; generate separate zones for red, green and blue lines-rgb_alpha <value (default 255)>; generate red, green and blue colour with alpha of this value-no_red; ignore red colour in vectorization-no_green; ignore green colour in vectorization-no_blue; ignore blue colour in vectorization-flatten; flatten the drawing after generating colours-rmv_rgb_dirt <threshold area default 0.0>; remove red, green and blue regions smaller than area
-expand_bitmap_rgb <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for rgb-threshrgb <value> <threshold for rgb vectorization default 0.200000>;-threshsv <saturation threshold default 0.500000> <value threshold default 0.500000>; thresholds onsaturation and value to consider a pixel to be grey

Colour Vectorization Options-color_vectorize; perform a colour vectorization-file2 <colour art filename>; specify the colour art bitmap-penstyle <center alpha (0.0-20.0)> <edge alpha (0.0-20.0)> <gamma (0-10)><centre pressure effect (0.01.0)> <edge pressure effect (0.0-1.0)><texture bitmap downscaling (0.2-20)> <texture bitmap file (valid
filename or "" if no file)>; generate brush texture for the line art-pressure_variation <strategy (0, 1 or 2)> <min pressure (0.0-1.0)> <max pressure (0.0-1.0)> <max variation(0.0-1.0)>; specify a pressure strategy for the centre line.
-blur_radius <pixels (default 0)>; blur the penstyle texture generated-color_contour_smooth_passes <times (default 3)>; perform number of smooth passes on contour before
computing texture-ccsp <times (default 3)>; short for -color_contour_smooth_passes-color_rmv_holesl <world units (default 0.000000)>; remove holes of this size when computing texture-color_fill_holesl <world units (default 0.000000)>; fill holes of this size for colour line art

106Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Bubble Usage (implemented only for colour vectorization's line art)-create_bubbles; add bubbles into the LineArt. Implemented for colour vectorization only
-bubble_gap <value (default 3)>; max number of colour art points between 2 bubbles-bubble_length <value (default 10)>; max number of circles in a bubble-min_radius <value (default 1.5000)>; min radius of a circle in a bubble relative to the line thickness (must be>= 1.0)-max_radius <value (default 3.5000)>; max radius of a circle in a bubble relative to the line thickness (must be>= 1.0)-uniform_gap; the space between bubbles is constant

4 Colour Vectorization-4colours [key:value] ... [key:value] ; The key value list can be empty. The list of keys is:
rgbdiff:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
dark:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
grey:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
white:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
dirt:value ; dirt area. 200 is a good value
rt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
gt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
bt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
NOTE
There must be no space between the colon and the key/value. For example: -4colours rgbdiff:20
dark:20 grey:120 white:250 dirt:200 rt:240 gt:240 bt:240

107

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

OpenQuickTime Video Options Dialog Box (GNU/Linux)
The OpenQuickTime Video Options dialog box (titled MediaSettings) allows you to configure the video
compression settings when exporting a QuickTime movie on Linux.

On GNU/Linux, Harmony uses the OpenQuickTime framework to export QuickTime movies. This frameworkuses its own user interfaces to allow you to configure the video and audio compression settings for a movie.
Because OpenQuickTime only comes bundled with non-prorprietary codecs, its compression options arelimited.
NOTESlFor tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

lThis dialog can only be accessed on macOS.

How to access the OpenQuickTime Video Options dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

108Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description
Allows you to select a video compression algorithm. By default, the following
codecs are available:lMotion-JPEG A: A very portable codec that performs lossy JPEG
compression and interlaces the frames. Motion-JPEG A compression isless efficient than Photo JPEG in terms of quality and file size, but may be
a more portable alternative for software that does not support Photo
JPEG.

l

l

codec
l

l

Photo JPEG: Encodes the movie as a sequence of JPEG images. JPEG
images have lossy compression. This is the most efficient codec for filesize.
Portable Network Graphics (PNG): Encodes the movie as a sequence of
PNG images. PNG images have lossless compression.
Tag Image File Format (TIFF): Encodes the movie as a sequence of
uncompressed TIFF images. This codec is lossless.
Uncompressed (RGB): Encodes the movie as uncompressed bitmap data.
This codec is lossless.

NOTE
Portable Network Graphics (PNG) and Photo JPEG are the only codecs inthis list that are natively supported by both Harmonyand GNOME's Totem
Video Player. Other codecs may require additional software to play on
GNU/Linux workstations.

109

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

quality

When using a JPEG-based codec, this allows you to set the JPEG compression
quality. By default, this will be set to 85. Possible values range from 0 to 100. The
higher the quality, the more disk space the resulting video file will take.

fieldDominanceFor codecs with interlacing. This is set to 1 by default. If set to 1, the first field will
be encoded on odd frames, and the second field will be encoded on even frames.
If set to 2, the first field will be encoded on even frames, and the second field will
be encoded on odd frames.

compression

The amount of lossless compression to perform when exporting in PNG format.
PNG compression is lossless, but higher compression settings will take longer toencode and decode.

packbits

For movies encoded in TIFF. When enabled, this option adds extra losslesscompression to the encoding.

lendian

For movies encoded in TIFF. When enabled, the video data is encoded in little
endian byte order, instead of big endian.

110Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Windows Media Video Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The WMV Settings dialog box allows you to configure the video and audio settings when exporting a movie in
Windows Media Video (.wmv) format.

NOTES
l

For tasks related to this dialog box, refer to the User Guide.

lThis dialog can only be accessed on Windows.

How to access the WMV Options dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box appears.

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select QuickTime ProRes Movie (*.mov).

111

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

3. Click on the Movie Options button.
The QuickTime Movie Options dialog box appears.

4. In the Codec drop-down, select any of the movie options.

Parameter

Description

Video
Variable Bit Rate
Quality

Allows you choose a quality setting ranging from 5 to 100 for the video stream.
The higher the quality of the export, the larger the resulting file.
Uncheck this checkbox if you want to export a movie without an audio track.

NOTE

Sound

The Sound section of this dialog is not available if you are exporting an
EDL/AAF/XML sequence, as this type of export creates video files with noaudio track and export sound clips in separate sound files.

Allows you to select one of the preset combinations of audio sample rates,
sample sizes and channel modes for the audio stream:l

Sample rate: Available sample rates are 8000 Hz, 16000 Hz, 22050 Hz
and 44100 Hz. The higher the sample rate, the better the audio quality.

NOTE

ProfileHarmony cannot export audio at a higher sample rate than 22.050
kHz. If you select a higher sample rate, your project's audio will be
upsampled, which means it will take more disc space without
increasing in quality.

lSample size: Also known as bit depth, this determines the amount of112

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

precision used to record each wavelength in the audio track. The standard
size is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk space the audio trackof your movie file requires is halved, but the audio quality will besignificantly lower.

NOTE
Exporting in 8-bit audio requires Apple QuickTime to be installed.

l

Channel mode: Available channel modes are Stereo and Mono. Stereo
sound has a separate audio track for the left and the right speakers,
whereas mono sound uses a single track for all speakers.

113

Chapter 2: Menus

Chapter 2: Menus
The Menus section covers all the menu entries available in Harmony. There are several types of menus in
Harmony: main menus, quick-access menus and view menus. Menus contains most of the functions available.
They may also have a toolbar button or keyboard shortcut equivalent.
Main Menus

115

Animation Menu

116

Drawing Menu

121

Edit Menu

126

File Menu

129

Help Menu

132

Insert Menu

134

Play Menu

136

Scene Menu

138

View Menu

140

Windows Menu

145

View Menus

147

Colour View Menu

148

Function View Menu

151

Library View Menu

153

Script Editor View Menu

155

114

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Main Menus
The top menu contains most of the commands available in Harmony. Depending on the view you're working inand the selected element, some commands are available and others not. The top menu is always located atthe very top of the interface.

On macOS, there is also a Harmony Essentials category that contains the following commands: Preferences,
About, and Quit.
Animation Menu

116

Drawing Menu

121

Edit Menu

126

File Menu

129

Help Menu

132

Insert Menu

134

Play Menu

136

Scene Menu

138

View Menu

140

Windows Menu

145

115

Chapter 2: Menus

Animation Menu
The Animation menu lets you access tools, adjust animation timing, set and parameters, lock or unlock layers,
and select elements in the Xsheet and Timeline views.

How to access the Animation menulAt the top of the interface, select Animation.

Command

Description

AnimateWhen this option is selected, every time you use theTransform or
Advanced Animation tools to manipulate an element
Animate Current Framein your scene, the position of the element will be stored in a keyframe
at the current frame. This allows you to animate elements in yourscene without creating keyframes manually.

When this option is selected, if you use theTransform or
Advanced Animation tools to make transformations to an

Animate Onion Skin Range

element in your scene, the transformations will be stored as keyframes
at the beginning and at the end of the current Onion Skin range, as
well as on every existing keyframe in-between. This can be useful if
you want to reposition an element that you have already animated, but
only during a specific range of frames, which you can define byenabling Onion Skin and setting the Onion Skin range to cover that
range of frames.

When this option is selected, if you use theTransform or
Advanced Animation tools to make transformation to an
Animate Off

element in your scene, the transformations will affect the element
throughout the whole scene. This can be useful if you want toreposition an element after you have already animated it.

Stop-Motion Keyframe

Converts the selected keyframes to stop-motion keyframes. Between
a stop-motion keyframe and the next keyframe, Harmonydoes not
generate any animation and the element remains static until the next
keyframe.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the selected keyframes.

116Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Tools

Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale andskew them.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an
object up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift toscale the element while maintaining its proportions.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you
move them towards or away from the camera.
Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or
modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0
fields. If your elements were drawn in a different location than the

Spline Offset

centre of the drawing area, it will look like the trajectory is not alignedwith your drawing. Also, if you have several elements attached to one
trajectory, you might want your trajectory to be at a different location
to represent the group's motion better.

Cell

Increase Exposure

Adds one more exposure to a selected cell; repeating this action adds
an extra cell each time. This is an efficient way to extend a drawing's
exposure and is always set in Insert mode. Increasing an exposure
pushes the existing exposure forward.

Decrease Exposure

Decreases exposure of a selected cell by one; repeating this action
decreases one exposure adds an extra cell each time. This is anefficient way to shorten a drawing's exposure. Decreasing an exposure
pulls in the existing exposure.

Set Exposure toLets you set the exposure to 1, 2, 3 or a custom exposure.

Extend Exposure

Lets you enter the frame up to which you want to extend the exposure.

117

Chapter 2: Menus

You can expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings
that were originally there or move the subsequent frames forward intime.
Add Key Exposure

Adds a key exposure to the selected cell.

Remove Key Exposure

Removes key exposures from the selected cells.
When working with drawings to adjust the timing of a mouth in a

Remove Duplicate Key Exposure

lipsync, for example, and forcing the use of specific key exposures,
unnecessary key exposures will be created. You can delete these
duplicates without affecting the rest of the drawing. The first drawingof the selection will be used for the range.

NOTE
Duplicate key exposures may occur when pasting with the
Enforce Key Exposure option selected.

Fill Empty Cells

Fills the empty frames in the selection with the exposure just before.
For example, if you select a range of frame that starts with an exposeddrawing and then ends with empty cells, all of the empty cells in theselection will be filled with the exposed drawing just before the empty
cells.

Insert Blank Cell

Adds an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure

Removes the exposure from the selected cell.

Clear Exposure and Pull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that
follow it.

Fill Selection

Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection canbe over one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over manycolumns, an entire column, or many columns. You can use numbers,
words, letters, or any alphanumeric value.

Sequence Fill

Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequencecan be forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as acycle, and so on. The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in
one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.

118

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Lip-Sync

Change Mouth Shape toLets you change the mouth shape to one of the following: A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, X.

Auto Lip-Sync Detection

Generates a sound detection for lip-sync.

Map Lip-Sync

Automatically maps drawings in an element to the mouth chart you
have generated for a sound. This can save time when you are lipsynching a voice track.

Flip
Flip Horizontal

Flips the selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the selection vertically.

Flip Scale X

Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal and verticalaxes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on
your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original
X-axis of the layer and flips the element following it.

Flip Scale Y

Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

Lock in Time

Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it
freely as other points are being added, moved, or adjusted (control
point).

Substitute Drawing Previous

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by theprevious drawing.

Substitute Drawing Next

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next
drawing.

Go to Previous Keyframe

Goes to the previous keyframe.

Go to Next Keyframe

Goes to the next keyframe.

119Chapter 2: Menus

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg elementin the Timeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in
the Timeline view.

Lock
Lock

Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.

UnlockUnlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

Lock All

Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.

Unlock All

Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.

Lock All Others

Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Reset All

Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation
angle will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all thetransformation values will be reset.
Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting
value. All transformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

120

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Drawing Menu
The Drawing menu lets you access many tools related to drawing, painting, dirt removal, optimizing strokes,
and more.

How to access the Drawing menulAt the top of the interface, select Drawing.

Command

Description

Drawing Tools

Allows you to select one of the drawing tools available in Harmony.

SelectAllows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brush strokes, pencil
lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines and shapes inyour artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and move vector points, move theBezier handles of the vector points as well as deform vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating the points at thecentre of its line rather than its contour.

CutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotate and skew
it.

Smooth Editor

Allows you to optimize contours and lines by removing its extra points, making
them easier to edit.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

Envelope

Allows you to deform and warp artwork by moving points and tweaking lines in a
grid.

Reposition All
Drawings

Allows you to reposition, scale, rotate and skew all drawings in the current layer.

Drawing Pivot

Allows you to position the pivot on a drawing layer by clicking where you want
its location to be.

121Chapter 2: Menus

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick and thin line
effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made of central
vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brush strokes.

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Colour Eyedropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the current
layer.

Line

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curved lines by clicking
to create each point in the sequence of line segments.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Repaint Brush

Like the Brush tool, but only paints over existing brush strokes.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the Paint tool. By
drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool will create a small invisible
stroke connecting the two closest points around the gap.

StrokeAllows you to create invisible lines that can serve as colour zones that can be
filled, or close the gaps in existing colour zones.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients and textures in acolour zone.

122Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Hand

Allows you to pan the Camera and Drawing views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Camera and Drawing views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Camera and Drawing views just like with a real animation
disc.

ConvertPencil Lines to Brush
StrokesConverts the selected centreline pencil strokes into contour strokes brush lines.

Brush Strokes toPencil Lines

Converts selected contour strokes into centreline pencil strokes. The brush stroke
thickness will be lost.

Strokes to Pencil
Lines

Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.

Break Apart Text
LayersText is treated as a single drawing object. This separates the text so eachcharacter becomes an individual drawing object you can select and modify
independently.

Optimize

FlattenMerges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If you draw newlines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be useful to flatten
them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn one on top of each other.
If you intend to repaint the lines or modify their shape, it will be easier if they areflattened.

SmoothSmooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.

Optimize

Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brush strokes, in the selecteddrawing objects. Drawing objects will only be flattened and optimized if theselected objects do not change the appearance of the final image when they are
merged.

Transform
Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

123

Chapter 2: Menus

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Rotate 180

Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Arrange
Bring to Front

Moves the selected art to the front (on top).

Bring Forward

Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).

Send Backward

Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).

Send to Back

Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).

Create Empty Drawing

Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may already be
exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets another drawing, key
exposure or a blank cell.
Creates a duplicate of the selected drawing in the layer. The duplicate drawing
will be exposed at the selected frame instead of the original drawing. Hence, thiscommand allows you to instantly start working on a duplicate of the current
drawing and retain the original.

Duplicate Drawings

NOTE
When duplicating a drawing, the exposure at the selected cell is replacedwith the new drawing, up until the next key exposure.

Delete Selected Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save your project, thesedrawings cannot be recovered.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Select Strokes with Current
ColourLets you select drawing elements and painted areas with the same colour as thecurrently selected colour in your colour palette.

124

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Previous Drawing

When a cell is selected in the Timeline view, displays the previous drawing.

Next Drawing

When a cell is selected in the Timeline view, displays the next drawing.

Previous Layer

When a cell is selected in the Timeline view, displays the previous layer.

Next Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline view, you can navigate between thedrawings, frames, and layers. Displays the previous drawing, next drawing,
previous layer or next layer.
When a cell is selected in the Timeline view, displays the next layer.

125

Chapter 2: Menus

Edit Menu
The Edit menu lets you repeat and undo actions, cut/copy/paste selected objects, select and manipulate
objects, work with symbols, and access the Preferences dialog box.

How to access the Edit menulFrom the top menu, select Edit.

Command

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project. Harmony supports
multiple undo, so you can undo changes you made in the order you
made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This command is active only
after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its
properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste Drawing Object

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a
view.

Paste Drawing Object in Place

Pastes the copied object in the same place as the original.

Paste Special

Opens the Paste Special dialog box which lets you determine howtemplates and symbols are imported in the Timeline view.
There are advanced paste options for drawings, timings, keyframes,
layers, as well as palettes and symbols.

Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the
Drawing, Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple
objects as one when moving them.

126Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items thatwere not selected. For example, if some lines are selected in a
drawing, this command will deselect them and select any other lines
in the drawing that were not selected.

Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from selected drawing elements in the Drawing or
Camera view or a layer or cells in the Timeline view.

Open Merge Editor

Lets you bring together (merge) the layer or drawings from different
versions of the same scene.
Extracts a symbol's contents and places it on the root timeline. Its
contents will be copied and inserted into the root timeline. The symbol
will not be removed from the Timeline view once it is expanded.

Expand Symbol

The symbol's layers will be parented to it in case you created motions
and transformations on the drawing layer that contain the symbol.
Breaking the hierarchy could result in the loss of any scaling andanimation you may have created.

Expand Selected Symbol in Groups

Expands a symbol within a group to avoid crowding the timeline witha series of layers. When you expand the symbols, the layers will becontained in a group node that you can expand to see the content.

Duplicate Selected Symbol

Creates a duplicate of a selected symbol. If other symbols are nested
inside the new symbol, they are not duplicated. If you modify them, theoriginal and other instances will also be modified.

Clone: Drawings Only

Creates a copy of the drawings in the selected layer in the Timeline
view. The timing it not copied.

Clone: Drawings and Timing

Creates a copy of the drawings and their timings in the selected layer
in the Timeline view.

Duplicate

Duplicates a layer to have a copy of the drawings that are independent
from the original ones, as well as an independent timing (exposure).
When you need the drawings to be modified independently, you will
want to duplicate the layer instead of cloning it.

Merge

Combines all drawings. Unused columns and layers will be deleted,but the original drawing files are still accessible.

127

Chapter 2: Menus

Group
Group

Groups selected drawing objects in the Camera or Drawing view.

Ungroup

Ungroups a selected group of drawing objects in the Camera or
Drawing view.

Edit Drawing Mode

When the Auto-Get Rights to Modify Drawings option is selected in
the Preferences dialog box (General tab), the system automaticallygets the rights to modify drawings when you select a drawing.
Otherwise, you must manually get the rights to modify drawings.

Edit Palette List Mode

When the Auto-Get Rights to Modify Palette option is selected in the
Preferences dialog box (General tab), the system automatically getsthe rights to modify palettes and palette lists when you select a colour
from a palette. Otherwise, you must manually get the rights to modify
a palette or palette list.

Get Rights to Modify Drawing

Manually releases the rights to modify a selected drawing.

Release Rights to Modify Drawing

Manually releases rights to modify a selected drawing.

Force Release Rights to Modify Drawing

This option is always available even if the Get Rights to Modify All
Scene Assets option is not selected in the Database Selector dialog
box.

Preferences

Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can set your preferencesfor Harmony.

128

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

File Menu
The File menu lets you open, close, save, scan, print, and import and export files.

How to access the File menulFrom the top menu, select File.

Command

Description

New

Creates a new scene while closing any scene already open. The New Scene dialog
box opens, asking for directory, name, and resolution information.

Open

Displays the Open Scene dialog box where you can browse for a scene file. You can
open a new scene from the current one and the previous scene will close.

Open Recent

Displays a list of the most recently opened scenes.

Clear

Clears the list of recently opened scenes.

Close

Closes the currently opened scene, but does not close the Harmony application.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened scene, drawings, palettes, and palette lists.
Lets you do the following:lAdvanced Savel

Save the scene as the current version.
Save different versions representing different stages of the production ofyour scene.

lSave different versions representing different scene setups.

lChoose specific assets that you want to save, such as drawings or palettes.

Rights to Modify Scene
VersionAllows you to modify the selected version of the scene as well as to manage andoverwrite other versions. Other users will not be able to open a different version of
the scene until you close the scene.

Rights to Modify Scene

Allows you to modify the currently selected scene version only. Unless the Get
rights to modify the scene option is also checked, you will not be able to change
other versions of the scene. This allows other users to modify different versions of
the scene while you are working on the selected version.

129

Chapter 2: Menus

Determines which drawing files have been modified on disk since you loaded them.
All updated drawings will be reloaded.
Read Changed Drawings

NOTE
Reloading a locked drawing will discard unsaved changes.

Manage Versions

Allows you to manage all the versions of the current scene.

Manage Local Cache

Opens the Manage Local Cache dialog, in which you can see all the Harmony
Server database scenes that were cached locally, delete unused caches and checkif the data in a scene's cache matches the data on the database server.
Saves the current file with a different name and at a different location.
Saves the current state of a scene as another scene. The Save As window prompts
you for a new name and a different location for this scene before saving it. This will
create a complete scene directory for the new scene.

Save AsNOTE
The scene name cannot exceed 23 characters.

Save as New Version

Saves the current scene as another version. The Save Version dialog box prompts
you to give a name for this new version. This will create a new .xstage file in yourcurrent project directory.

AcquireFrom TWAIN

Opens the Acquire from Scanner window from which you can set parameters
before scanning.

ImportImagesImports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

Movie

Lets you convert a QuickTime movie to an image sequence and audio file.

Sound

Lets you import sound files into your project.

SWF, Illustrator

Lets you import SWF files into your project.

130Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Files to Library

Vector File

Opens the Import PDF dialog where you may import Adobe Illustrator (.ai) andPortable Document Files (.pdf).

ImagesExports a scene as a bitmap image sequence. If there is sound in your scene, it will
not be exported with the images.

Movie

Exports animation as a QuickTime movie.

ExportExports a Flash movie file.
SWF

Harmony supports exporting Flash movie files with a limited subset of vector andbitmap effects, the latter which can be previewed in Render View

Quit

Closes the application.

131

mode.

Chapter 2: Menus

Help Menu
The Help menu lets you display the Harmony documentation, Welcome screen and end user license
agreement, as well as access the Toon Boom website, and identify the product name and version number.

How to access the Help menulAt the top of the interface, select Help.

Command

Description

Online Help

Opens the Harmony Help system, complete with instructions on how
to use the system. This requires an internet connection.

Getting Started

Opens the Harmony Getting Started Guide (in PDF format) in abrowser window. Requires Acrobat Reader.

Scripting Interface Documentation

Opens the Harmony Scripting Interface Documentation.

Extended Scripting Interface
Documentation

Opens the Harmony Extended Scripting Interface Documentation.

Script Node Documentation

Opens the Harmony Script Node Documentation.

Python Interface Documentation

Opens the Harmony Python Scripting Documentation. See

Toon Boom on the Web

Opens the Toon Boom website, which features a Support andCommunity > Forum section.

Customer Experience Improvement
Program

The Customer Experience Improvement Program allows Toon Boom
to collect usage information. The data does not contain any personallyidentifiable information and cannot be used to identify you. The data
will consist of a basic hardware description, a project summary andusage information. The information is used only for software
improvement purposes, as well as for sharing with third parties for thesame reason.
This program is enabled by default but is voluntary. If you prefer not toparticipate, you can opt out when you first launch the software, byusing a global preference, or by a command line argument.

132

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

About

Identifies the product name and version number.

Show Welcome Screen

Displays the Harmony Welcome screen.

Show End User License Agreement

Displays the End User License Agreement.

133

Chapter 2: Menus

Insert Menu
The Insert menu lets you create empty symbols in the Library view, different types of layers in the Timelineview, keyframes and control points.

How to access the Insert menulAt the top of the interface, select Insert.

Command

Description

Create Empty Symbol in Library

Creates an empty symbol in the Library view to which you can edit
(add content).

Bone

Adds a new Bone layer to the Timeline view.

CameraAdds a new Camera layer to the Timeline view.

Colour-Card

Adds a new Colour-Card layer to the Timeline view.

Drawing

Adds a new Drawing layer to the Timeline view and a column in the
Xsheet view.

Game Bone

Adds a new Game Bone layer to the Timeline view.

Kinematic Output

Adds dd a new Kinematic Output layer to the Timeline view.

Peg

Adds a new Peg layer to the Timeline view.

Quadmap

Adds a new Quadmap layer to the Timeline view.

Effects

Adds a new layer in the Timeline view with the effect you select: Blur,
Brightness-Contrast, Colour-Scale, Cutter, Glow, Shadow, orTransparency.

Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Keyframe and Duplicate Drawing

Adds a keyframe to the selected drawing layer cell in the Timelineview and creates a duplicate of the drawing, which sits on top of theoriginal drawing.

134

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Control Point

Adds a control point to the trajectory of the selected element or peg in
the Camera view when the element or peg is in a 3D path. Note thatyou must have a 3D path in the peg portion in order to add a control
point.

135

Chapter 2: Menus

Play Menu
The Play menu lets you play back animation and sound. Use it to scrub the sound to create your lip-sync, loop
the playback, navigate through frames, and change the playback range and speed.

How to access the Play menulAt the top of the interface, select Play.

Command

Description

Play

Plays the scene in the Camera or Drawing view.

Render and Play

Renders your scene's frames, then opens the rendered frames in Playfor playback.
This allows you to preview your scene's animation in real time, withthe effects rendered and with no risk of slowdown.
Exports your scene as it appears in the Camera view into a movie file,then opens it in your workstation's default video player.

Record and PlayThis allows you to preview your animation without any risk of
slowdown, but it does not preview the effects in your scene. However,
it is much faster than Render and Play.
This button automates the usage of the Export OpenGL Frames dialog
see

Test SWF Movie

Quickly exports your scene as a Flash Movie (.swf), then opens it inyour workstation's default web browser.

Stop

Stops playback.

Mini Playback

Open the Mini Playback dialog. This dialog allows you to set theamount of frames before and after the current frame to playback whenusing Mini Playback, to set the speed of Mini Playback and to start Mini
Playback.

Start Mini Playback

Begins Mini Playback using the last settings entered in the Mini
Playback dialog. By default, Mini Playback will play 5 frames before
and after the current frame, at the scene's frame rate.

136Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Playback Speed

Opens the Set New Frame Rate dialog box where you can set theframe rate at which the playback plays.

Loop

If pressed, your scene will repeat indefinitely when playing.
Otherwise, it will stop when the end is reached.

Enable Sound

Turns on sound during playback.

Enable Sound Scrubbing

Turns on sound scrubbing during playback.

Start Frame

Opens the Set Playback Start Frame dialog box , in which you canenter the frame number from which to start playback.

Stop Frame

Opens the Set Playback Stop Frame dialog box, in which you can set
the frame number at which to stop playback.

First Frame

Moves the red playhead to the first frame.

Previous Frame

Moves the red playhead to the previous frame.

Next Frame

Moves the red playhead to the next frame.

Last Frame

Moves the red playhead to the last frame.

Go to Frame

Opens the Go to Frame dialog box where you can enter the frame
number on which the red playhead to be positioned in the Timeline
view.

Enable Playback
Top View

Plays back your animation in the Top view.

Side View

Plays back your animation in the Side view.

Perspective View

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

137Chapter 2: Menus

Scene Menu
The Scene menu lets you set the scene length, add frames to the scene, view different displays of the scene,
set render options, access the Scene Settings dialog box and Elements Manager window, and verify thedrawing and palette files in your project.

How to access the Scene menulAt the top of the interface, select Scene.

Command

Description

Scene Length

Lets you set the length of the scene in frames.

Frame
Add Frames at Start

Adds the number of frames you specify to the beginning of the scene.

Add Frames at End

Adds the number of frames you specify to the end of the scene.

Add Frames Before Selection
Adds the number of frames you specify before or after your selection.
Add Frames After Selection
Remove Selected Frames

Deletes the selected frames from your scene.

CameraDefault Camera

Scene Settings

Lets you select a camera. If you only add one camera to your scene,
you will only see Default Camera in your list.
Opens the Scene Settings dialog box where you can set the resolution,alignment, bitmap resolution and many other parameters.

RenderAuto Render

Automatically recalculates the preview image whenever you modify aparameter. If your scene is heavy and you do not want the preview
rendered automatically, deselect the Auto-Render option and do the138Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

preview update manually.Note that this will slow down Harmony as it
takes resources to update every frame.
Cancel Preview Render

Cancels a render that was started.

139

Chapter 2: Menus

View Menu
The View menu lets you manipulate the view by zooming, panning, or rotating. You can also display the gridand change its size, use the onion skin feature to help with drawing, and set the preview resolution.

How to access the View menulAt the top of the interface, select View.

Command

Description
Cycles through the following display modes:lToggle Full ScreenllNormal Full-Screen: The main application window becomesfull screen.
View Full-Screen: The selected view becomes full screen andall other views are collapsed.
Normal: The main application window is restored to its original
size and collapsed views are expanded.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animationtable.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like ananimation table.

Mirror View

Temporarily flips the Camera or Drawing view horizontally, allowing
you to view and edit your artwork as if it was being mirrored.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

140

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Grid
Show Grid

Displays the grid.

Underlay

Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

Overlay

Displays the grid over the drawing elements.

Square Grid

Displays a standard square grid.

12 Field Grid

Displays a 12-field size grid.

16 Field Grid

Displays a 16-field size grid.

Onion Skin

Show Onion Skin

Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By default, theprevious drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings are
displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in the
Preferences dialog box.

Add to Onion Skin

Adds a series of selected elements to the onion skin preview.

Remove from Onion Skin

Removes a series of selected elements from the onion skin preview.

Remove Unselected from Onion
Skin

Removes all elements except the ones selected from the onion skinpreview.

Add All to Onion Skin

Adds all of the scene's elements to the onion skin preview.

Remove All from Onion Skin

Removes all of the scene's elements from the onion skin preview.

Onion Skinning by Frames

Selects the drawings to display in the Onion Skin by their frame
number relative to the current frame. For example, if the Onion Skin is
set to include 2 drawings before and after the current frame, it will
include the drawings up to two frames before and up to two frames
after the current frame, even if those drawings are the same as the one
in the current frame. This is more useful for cut-out animation as itallows you to position a drawing relative to its position in adjacentframes.

141

Chapter 2: Menus

NOTE
This option only works in the Camera view.

Selects the drawings to display in the Onion Skin by the amount ofdifferent drawings before and after the current frame. For example, if
the Onion Skin is set to include 2 drawings before and after the current
frame, this will display the nearest two different drawings before andafter the drawing in the current frame in the Onion Skin, even if thoseOnion Skinning by Drawings

drawings are further than 2 frames away from the current frame. Thisis more useful for frame-by-frame animation.

NOTE
When this option is enabled, the handles allowing you to adjust
the extent of the Onion Skin in the Timeline view are notavailable.

Reduce One Previous Drawing

Reduces the number of previous visible drawings by one.

Add One Previous Drawing

Adds one drawing to the number of previous visible drawings.

Reduce One Next Drawing

Reduces the number of next visible drawings by one.

Add One Next Drawing

Adds one drawing to the number of next visible drawings.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see the previous and subsequent
active layers in washed-out colours. It is useful for seeing the otherlayers when designing, animating or cleaning up your animation.

Show
Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Current Drawing on Top

Displays the selected drawing on top of everything while you draw. By
enabling this option, each time you select a drawing tool, the selecteddrawing is displayed in front of everything in the Camera view. The
Timeline view ordering remain unchanged.You only need to enable
this option once, it is not necessary to do it each time you select adrawing tool.

142

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference GuideShow Strokes

Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines standout.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Alignment Guides

Alignment Guides
When enabled, alignment guides will be visible in the Camera andDrawing views.

Show Alignment Guides

This is enabled by default. Disabling this option will hide and disablealignment guides, meaning that animation and drawing tools will not
snap to them, even if theSnap to Alignment Guides option isenabled in the Tool Properties view.
It is possible to reposition alignment guides in the current panel bydragging them using theTransform tool. Enabling this option will

Lock Alignment Guides

lock the alignment guides in their current position, allowing you tomanipulate layers and artwork in your scene without accidentally
moving alignment guides.

Clear Alignment Guides

Removes all the alignment guides from your scene.
Adds a horizontal alignment guide to the middle of the stage.

New Horizontal Alignment
Guide

TIP
You can move the alignment guide from its default position
using theTransforml tool or the

Select tool.

Adds a vertical alignment guide to the middle of the stage.

New Vertical Alignment Guide

TIP
You can move the alignment guide from its default position
using theTransforml tool or the

Select tool.

ParticleShow Particles as Dots in
OpenGL

Displays the particles as dots in the OpenGL preview mode. This
makes the playback speed faster for a heavy scene.

143Chapter 2: Menus

Preview Manager

Opens the Preview Manager where you can set options for the qualityof previews, and clearing and updating the cache.

Preview Resolution
Same as Scene Resolution
3/4 of Scene Resolution
1/2 of Scene Resolution

Lets you choose a resolution for previewing a scene.

1/3 of Scene Resolution
1/4 of Scene Resolution

CustomLets you select a resolution from a list of presets or enter X and Y
values for a custom preview resolution.
Let's you increase or decrease the preview quality of raw bitmap
images. By default, bitmap files imported in Harmony will display in a
low resolution in the Camera view to avoid hindering performance.

TIP

Bitmap File Quality

You can change the default resolution in which bitmap files are
displayed in the Camera view by changing the Small Bitmap
Resolution preference located in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog.

NOTE
This only affects the way bitmap images display in the OpenGL
preview of the scene in the Camera view. The preview quality ofbitmap images does not affect the final render.

144

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Windows Menu
The Windows menu lets you customize your workspace to suit your working style, save it as a newworkspace, and load it from the Workspace toolbar. You can also show or hide the different toolbars andviews in Harmony.

How to access the Windows menulFrom the top menu, select Windows.

Command

Description

Restore Default Workspace

Returns modified workspaces to their original default layout if you do
not like the current modifications or inadvertently closed some
windows.

Workspace

Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager where you can modify, create, delete,rename and reorder your workspaces.

Workspace

Lets you open workspaces designed specifically for animating,compositing, hand drawing, scripting and the default workspace.
Allows you to add or remove toolbars from your workspace.

Toolbars

NOTE
For information on the different toolbars in Harmony, see
Toolbars.

CameraShows or hides the Camera view.

ColourShows or hides the Colour view.

Drawing

Shows or hides the Drawing view.

FunctionShows or hides the Function view.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

145Chapter 2: Menus

Library

Shows or hides the Library view.

Message Log

Shows or hides the Message Log view.

Side

Shows or hides the Side view.

Timeline

Shows or hides the Timeline view.

Tool Properties

Shows or hides the Tool Properties view.

Top

Shows or hides the Top view.

XsheetShows or hides the Xsheet view.

Integrated Help

Shows or hides the Integrated Help view.

Metadata Editor

Shows or Hides the Metadata Editor view.

Script Editor

Shows or hides the Script Editor view.

146Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

View Menus
A view menu contains commands specifically related to that view.

How to access a view menu
1. In the top-left corner of a view, click the Menu

button.

Colour View Menu

148

Function View Menu

151

Library View Menu

153

Script Editor View Menu

155

147

Chapter 2: Menus

Colour View Menu
The Colour View menu lets you access commands related to the Colour view such as creating new palettes,
adding new colour swatches, and displaying the Tint panel.

How to access the Colour menul

In the upper-left corner of the Colour view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Palettes
Creates a new colour palette.

New

By default, Toon Boom Harmony Essentials is set to the Basic mode. For simple
productions, it is recommended to use the Basic mode. This setting stores thepalettes automatically for you and saves them at the Scene level. When you use
the Advanced Palette Lists mode, you can decide at which level you want to store
your palettes: Environment, Job, Scene, or Element.

ImportImports a colour palette located on your hard drive.

RemoveRemoves the selected palette from the palette list.

Remove and Delete
on Disk

Removes the selected palette from the palette list and deletes the palette filefrom the disk.

RenameLets you five the selected colour palette a new name.

Duplicate

Creates a copy of the original palette, using the same names and colour values,
but has a different ID and is independent from the original palette. This ensuresthat both the duplicate and original palettes are completely independent.

Clone

Creates a copy of the master palette. The colours in each palette have the same
properties. The colours have the same identification number pointing to the same
colour zones, but they can have different names and RGBA values.

Move Up

Moves the selected colour palette up one level.

Move Down

Moves the selected colour palette down one level.

148

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Colour Editor

Opens the Colour Editor where you can pick and edit colour swatches.

Tint Panel

Opens the Tint panel where you can modify a series of colours to blend a tint inthem or offset their RGBA values.

Current PaletteOverrides

When clone palettes are present in the palette list, by default, priority is given to
the palette that is the highest in the palette list to decide which colours to apply
to drawings. With this option enabled, priority is given to the currently selected
palette. Selecting any of the clone palettes will make drawings use colours fromthe selected palette instead.

Display Colour
Values

Display the colour values beside their colour swatches in the palette list.

Colours
Cut

Cuts the selected colour swatch from the palette.

Copy

Copies the selected colour swatch which you can paste in a different palette.

Copy Colour ID

Copies a colour swatch's colour ID so you can keep a reference file of colour IDs
or use them with custom plug-ins. Example of a colour ID: 075cf5b552401130.

Paste Colour Values

Pastes the colour value of the copied swatch over an existing colour swatch.

Paste As New
Colours

Creates a new colour swatch from the colour value of the copied swatch.

Paste As Clones

Pastes a copied colour to a new palette as a clone of the original one. Both colour
use the same colour ID. They have to be in different palettes.

New

Creates a new colour swatch from the colour swatch that was last selected.

Edit

Opens the Colour Picker window in which you can edit the selected colour
swatch.

DeleteDeletes the selected colour swatch from the palette.

New Texture

Lets you add a bitmap colour swatch to your palette. You can load photos andtextures and paint your drawings with it. The bitmap image must be a .tga or .psd

149

Chapter 2: Menus

file format.

Edit Texture

Opens the browser to replace the texture used in a textured colour swatch. Allzones using the swatch will be updated with the new texture.

Scale Down Texture

Lets you set a new maximum texture size or scaling factor.

Protect Colour

Locks a selected colour, so if you ever paint over it accidentally, the work alreadydone will not be affected. You can also block the filling colours if you painted allof the animation in Line Art and plan to repaint the lines.

Swatch Mode

Displays the colour swatches with its corresponding name inside the swatch.
When this option is not selected, the names of the colour swatches are displayed
beside the swatch.

Independent Bitmap
ColourBitmap colour selection is independent from the vector colour selection.

Bitmap Colour Sliders
RGB

Displays the colour picking sliders as RGB (red, green, blue).

HSV

Displays the colour picking sliders as HSV (hue, saturation, value).

150

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Function View Menu
The Functions View menu lets you do many things in the Camera view, including selecting and editing objects
in different views, changing the display, setting morphing parameters, accessing tools and many more.

How to access the Function menul

In the upper-left corner of the Function view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select Next Keyframe

Selects the next keyframe.

Select Previous
Keyframe

Selects the previous keyframe.

Select Left Handle

Selects the left handle of the selected keyframe.

Select Right Handle

Selects the right handle of the selected keyframe.

Select All

Selects all objects in the Function view. This helps you manage multiple objects
as one.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Function view.

View

151

Chapter 2: Menus

Show Current Frame

Displays the current frame

Toggle Grid

Enables the display of the grid.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Function List

Auto Load Selection

Sets the Function view to automatically load the functions of layers when thenode is selected in the Node View.

Clear

Will clear all functions in the Function view.

Load Selection

Loads the functions of the current node selection.

Add Selection

Adds the functions of the currently selected node.

Remove Selection

Will remove the function of the currently selected node from the Function view.
Show Motion: Displays the function for Motion (the Pos_x and Pos_y).
Show Rotation: Displays the function for Rotation (Angle_z).

Show
Show Scale: Displays the function for Scaling (Scale_x and Scale_y).
Show Skew: Displays the function for Skew.

152

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Library View Menu
The Library View menu lets you access commands specific to the Library view, such as opening a Library or
getting the rights to modify a library folder.

How to access the Library menul

In the upper-left corner of the Library view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

View
List

Displays the contents of the selected folder as a list.

Thumbnails

Displays the contents of the selected folder as a thumbnails.

Details

Displays the details of the selected file.

Generate Thumbnails

Creates a thumbnail to display in the preview window.

Edit
Creates a new symbol from a drawing or part of a drawing in the Drawing or
Camera view, or a layer in the Timeline view.
New Symbol

If your selection is in the Timeline , the new symbol appears in the Symbol folder.
The current selection is not replaced by the new symbol. The new symbol only
appears in the library. You must drag it into your scene to use it.
If your selection is in the Drawing or Camera view, the new symbol appears in the
Symbol folder and in the Timeline view as a new layer.

Cut

Cuts the selected file in the Library view.

Copy

Copies the selected file in the Library view.

Paste

Pastes the selected file in the Library view.

DeleteDeletes the selected file in the Library view.

153Chapter 2: Menus

Delete Thumbnails

Deletes any thumbnails that were generated for display in the preview window.
Places you inside the symbol where you can edit it.

Edit Symbol

To return to the project's timeline, click the Top

button in the Camera view's

top-left corner, press Ctrl + Shift + E (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + Shift + E (macOS).
Remove Unused Files

Removes any files not in use in the selected template.

Rename Template

Lets you rename a selected template.

Import Files

Imports vector files such as AI, PDF, and SWF. You requires the right to modify
the library in which you want to import the files.

Folders

New Folder

Creates a new folder in the Library view. Before you can create a new folder, youmust have the right to modify the folder in which you are creating the new folder.

RefreshUpdates the view and its contents.

Open LibraryLets you open a library on your computer.

Close Library

Unlinks a library folder from your library list.

154

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Script Editor View Menu
The Script Editor view menu gives you access to all of the commands needed for editing and testing scripts in
the Script Editor view—see Script Editor View on page 374.

How to access the Script Editor view menu
1. Add the Script Editor view to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on the

Add View button and select Script

Editor.
l

In the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

2. In the top-left corner of the Script Editor view, click on the

ButtonMenu button.

Description

File
Creates a new script. When you click on this button, you are first prompted to typein a name for the script. Then, you will be prompted to select which location tosave the script in:ll

New Scriptl

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You
will be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you arelogged in as the same user.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will beable to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only
available if this environment variable is set.

NOTE
For more information on script locations, see Script list on page 374.

Import Script

Allows you to import a script from your machine into Harmony. When you click on
this button, you are prompted to browse for and select a script on your file system.
Then, you are prompted to select which location to import the script in:l

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You
will be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you arelogged in as the same user.

155

Chapter 2: Menus

ButtonDescriptionll

Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will beable to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only
available if this environment variable is set.

NOTES
l

l

When you import a script, any user interface (.ui) or icon (.png) file thatis in the same directory and has the same filename as the script will also
be imported.
For more information on script locations, see Script Editor View on page
374.

Deletes the selected script.

NOTES
l

Delete ScriptlRefresh Script File
List

You cannot delete a script if it is in the Application Resources location, as
those are scripts that are installed with Harmony.
If you delete a script that was originally in Application Resources but
which you copied to another location so you could make changes to it, theoriginal version of the script in the Application Resources folder will be
restored to the list.

Refresh the list of scripts in the Script Editor. If there are new scripts in your user
preferences or your scene's scripts sub-folder, click on this button to be able toopen them in the Script Editor.

EditorAllows you to type in the path and name for your preferred text editing software.

NOTES
Set External Editorll

On macOS, only typing the name of your preferred text editing softwareis enough if that application supports the AppleScript Open Document
protocol.
On Windows, unless your text editor is in your system's PATH
environment variable, you will have to type in the full path to the editor.

156

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

ButtonDescription

External Editor

Opens the selected script in the chosen external text editing software.

Play/Debug
Prompts you to select which script and which function to use with the Run and
Debug commands.

NOTES
Set Targetll

You can set the entire script as the target by selecting the <Nothing>
function from the functions list.
You cannot link an entire script to a toolbar button. Only functions within
scripts can be added as toolbar buttons. Therefore, running or debugging
an entire script rather than one of its functions should be done for testing
purposes only.

Runs the target script and function.

NOTES
l

Run
l

l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted to
set one when you select this command.
You can set or change the target script and function by selecting Set
Target from this menu.
If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply run what you
typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is set.

Open the target script and function in the Qt Script Debugger, in which you can test
and debug the function.

NOTES
Debug

l

l

l

Stop

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted to
set one when you select this command.
You can set or change the target script and function by selecting Set
Target from this menu.
If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply debug what
you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is set.

If a script is currently running, this interrupts its execution.

157

Chapter 2: Menus

ButtonDescription

Help
Opens the reference documentation for the Harmony scripting interface in a web
browser.
Scripting Interface
Documentation

NOTE
This documentation is installed with Harmony and does not require Internet
access.

158

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

159

Chapter 3: Layers

Chapter 3: Layers
In Harmony, everything that constitutes the different elements of a scene, including drawing layers, soundeffects, visual effects and pegs is represented by a layer in the Timeline view.
At the core of the rendered picture is the drawing layer, which is used to display drawings. Those layers are
rendered from bottom to top, with the bottommost layer appearing in the background, and the topmost layer
appearing in the foreground.
Some layers, such as Peg, Bone or Quadmap layers, are made to offset drawing layers. They must be createdas the parent of a drawing layer, or of a hierarchy of drawing layers, in order to transform the layers in therendered image.
Other layers, such as Blur and Transparency layers, are made to transform the picture output by drawing
layers. They must be created as children of drawing layers, or groups of drawing layers, in order to transformthe drawings.
Deformation Layers

161

Bone Layers

162

Deformation Composite Layer

164

Game Bone Layer

165

Kinematic Output Layer

167

Effect Layers

168

Blur Layer

169

Colour-Scale Layer

171

Cutter Layer

173

Glow Layer

175

Shadow Layer

178

Transparency Layer

181

Image Layers

182

Colour-Card Layer

183

Drawing Layer

185

Move Layers

190

Camera Layer

191

Peg Layer

192

Quadmap Layer

194

Sound Layer

197

160

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Deformation Layers
Deformation layers are layers that make deformers. In Harmony, deformers are made of chains of deformation
layers laid out in a hierachy. Each deformation layer represents a point in the deformation chain.
Bone Layers

162

Deformation Composite Layer

164

Game Bone Layer

165

Kinematic Output Layer

167

161

Chapter 3: Layers

Bone Layers
The Bone node is one of the main nodes used to build a deformation rig. Each Bone node consists of a bone
and an articulation. You can chain Bone nodes to create a skeleton chain for your character. The Rigging tool
can be used to create and connect those nodes automatically.

Properties

Parameter

Descriptions

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Side and Top
views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

The name of the node as it appears in the Node View and the Timeline view. Eachnode must have a name that is unique to its containing group.

Resting Parameters Rest Offset(x) AxisThis is the bone x-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the resting position.

(y) AxisThis is the bone y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the resting position.

162

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Rest RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the resting position.

Rest Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the resting position.

Rest Bias

This is the articulation's bias (roundness and smoothness) for the resting position.

Rest Length

This is the bone's length for the resting position.

Deform Parameters Offset

2D PathWhen this option is enabled, the X and Y-axis parameters are controlled by thesame 2D path function.

Separate

When this option is enabled, the X and Y-axis parameters are individual one fromanother.

Path

When using a 2D Path, this field displays the name of the function.

(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

(y) AxisThis is the bone y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the animation position.
This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the animation position. This parameter canbe linked to a function to be animated over time.

Bias

This is the articulation's bias (roundness and smoothness) for the animation
position. This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

LengthThis is the bone's length for the animation position. This parameter can be linked
to a function to be animated over time.

163

Chapter 3: Layers

Deformation Composite Layer
The Deformation-Composite node is automatically added to a rig when creating a split deformation chain. It is
used to link the different nodes of a split deformation chain together before deforming the drawing it is linked
to.

Properties
Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has
no visible effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the
Camera, Side and Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

164Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Game Bone Layer
The Bone node is one of the main node used to build a deformation rig. Each Bone node consists of a bone andan articulation. Chaining Bone nodes will create a skeleton chain for your character. The Rigging tool can beused to create and connect those nodes automatically.

Parameter

Descriptions

Resting Parameters Rest Offset(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the resting position.

(y) AxisThis is the bone Y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the resting position.

Rest RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the resting position.

Rest Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the resting position.

Rest Length

This is the bone's length for the resting position.

Deform Parameters Offset

2D PathWhen this option is enabled, the X and Y axis parameters are controlled by thesame 2D path function.

165

Chapter 3: Layers

Separate

When this option is enabled, the X and Y axis parameters are individual from eachother.

Path

When using a 2D Path, this field displays the name of the function curve.

(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

(y) AxisThis is the bone Y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the animation position.
This parameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the animation position. This parameter canbe linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

LengthThis is the bone's length for the animation position. This parameter can be linked
to a function curve to be animated over time.

166Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Kinematic Output Layer
The Kinematic Output node lets you hook a separate element that you want to be linked to the deformation
chain but not be part of the deformation, such as a hand to an arm or an arm to the body. These elements will
follow the movement of the chain just like a regular cut-out character hierarchy piece without being influenced
by the deformation of the arm. If you don't use the Kinematic Output, the piece's pivot will not follow the
deformation.
Connect a Kinematic Output node below the deformation node you want your drawing to follow.

167

Chapter 3: Layers

Effect Layers
Effect layers can be connected under a layer or under a group to transform the image.
Should you need to apply the same effect to several layers combined, you must group them together so that
Harmony composes those layers into a single image before applying the effect.
Blur Layer

169

Colour-Scale Layer

171

Cutter Layer

173

Glow Layer

175

Shadow Layer

178

Transparency Layer

181

168

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Blur Layer
T-HFND-010-007
The Blur effect creates an effect that softens, fogs or obscures the image evenly in all directions. This effect isuseful when you want to make cloudy images not realistically seen in detail, such as a drawing object that is
farther back or in the background of your scene, usually blurry due to the laws of atmospheric perspective.
Other uses include the general softening of objects such as snow, stars and shadows that do not naturally
have a hard outline.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

The name of the node as it appears in the Node View and the Timeline view. Eachnode must have a name that is unique to its containing group.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When this option is deselected, the effect's values
remain unchanged regardless of any depth or scale changes. This option should
be deselected when multiple drawings are composited and attached to this169

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

effect.

RadiusSize of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the strength or reach of the blur.
The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position. Click the
Edit Curve button to change these values over time by adjusting the function
curve.

Quality

Select High for a slow and accurate operation or Low for a faster operation with amore raw look.

Matte

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied tothe opaque areas of the matte drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect isapplied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

170

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Colour-Scale Layer
The Colour-Scale effect offsets an image's colours. This effect is useful in creating ambient transitions, such as
from daytime to nighttime.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

The name of the node as it appears in the Node View and the Timeline view. Eachnode must have a name that is unique to its containing group.

Red

The factor by which to multiply red values in the image.

171

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

Green

The factor by which to multiply green values in the image.

Blue

The factor by which to multiply blue values in the image.

Alpha

The factor by which to multiply alpha values in the image.

Hue

The colour or hue to offset the image.

Saturation

The amount of colour to offset the image.
Enter the value for the colour to offset the image. The actual colour values of theimage are not changed; instead, the channels are multiplied by a selectedamount. For example:
l

Value
l

l

Invert Matte

A value of 1 does not change the colour values.
A value greater than 1 brings the colour channel value closer to 255 (orwhite).
A value less than 1 brings the colour channel value closer to zero (0 orblack).

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied tothe opaque areas of the matte drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect isapplied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

172

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Cutter Layer
T-HFND-010-009
The Cutter effect cuts out a portion of an image. To do this, it needs to be connected to the drawing it isintended to cut as well as to a matte layer. The cutter will take the shape of the drawing in the matte layer andcut this shape out of the drawing layer. This is especially useful if you want to make a character disappear
between a background element, or if you want to cut out a hole in the middle of a character.
Like all effects that use a matte, the Cutter's effect has an Inverted parameter, which is disabled by default.
When enabled, the Cutter will have the reverse effect: Instead of cutting the matte's shape out of the drawing,
it will cut everything outside of the matte's shape out of the drawing, leaving only the parts of the drawingthat are covered by the matte. This can be useful if, for example, you want to draw shadows or highlights for acharacter, but you don't want to have to worry about them bleeding beyond your character's outline. You cansimply connect your shadow or highlight to an inverted cutter, and use a clone of your character as the matte,
and your effect will not display outside of your character's outlines.
The Cutter effect can be used with 2D-3D integration. Rendered 2D drawings, integrated with 3D models,display soft, anti-aliased edges, even where the Cutter effect is applied.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

173

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Side and Top
views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Inverted

When this option is enabled, the Cutter node will invert the matte shape to cut
the drawing. Instead of cutting the image intersecting with the matte, it will cut
any artwork outside of the matte shape.

174

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Glow Layer
T-HFND-010-009B
The Glow effect turns your image into a glow area with a bright soft-edged light or diffuse light region aroundan image. The Glow effect is useful for creating a shining rim around objects, such as the sun or stars. Clone
your layer to display the original image on top of the glow.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

175

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Side and Top
views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Truck Factor

The name of the node as it appears in the Node View and the Timeline view. Eachnode must have a name that is unique to its containing group.
Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.
Allows you to choose between the following blur types for the effect:l

Blur Typel

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points thatmake up the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction configured with the
Directional Angle and Directional Falloff Rate parameters.

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you set the Blur Type to Directional, this sets the angle of the blur. The value
goes from 0 to 360, with 0 meaning west, and angles going counterclockwise. For
example:Directional Anglel0: Blurs the image to the west.

l

90: Blurs the image to the south.

l180: Blurs the image to the east.

l

270: Blurs the image to the north.

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a decimalvalue between 0 and 1. For example:
Directional Falloff Ratell

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from theedge of the character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge

176

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

Descriptionof the image.

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied toopaque areas of the drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect is applied totransparent or empty areas of the drawing.
Instead of using the colour in the Colour parameters, this uses the colours in thesource drawing to generate the effect.

Use Source Colour

NOTE
The effect of this parameter is only visible in Render View

Multiplicativemode.

Multiplies the colours of the effect with the colours of the background. Thisintensifies the effect.

ColourRed

The amount of red to add to the colour in the background image.

Green

The amount of green to add to the colour in the background image.

Blue

The amount of blue to add to the colour in the background image.

Alpha

The alpha value of the effect.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker dialog, in which you can visually select a colour for theeffect.

Intensity

Allows you to set the factor by which to multiply the intensity of the effect. Thisparameter can take a decimal value between 0 and 1. At 1, the effect is fully
applied. At 0, the effect is not visible.

177Chapter 3: Layers

Shadow Layer
With the Shadow effect, you can turn a drawing into a shadow. It doesn't matter if the drawing layer is a fully
coloured character. The Shadow effect will render it into a grey, semitransparent, slightly blurry silhouette.
You must clone your layer to see the original image displayed on top of the shadow.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties
Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Side and Top
views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

The name of the node as it appears in the Node View and the Timeline view. Eachnode must have a name that is unique to its containing group.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.

Blur Type

Allows you to choose between the following blur types for the effect:178

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Parameter

DescriptionllRadiusRadial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points thatmake up the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction configured with the
Directional Angle and Directional Falloff Rate parameters.

Enter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you set the Blur Type to Directional, this sets the angle of the blur. The value
goes from 0 to 360, with 0 meaning west, and angles going counterclockwise. For
example:Directional Anglel0: Blurs the image to the west.

l

90: Blurs the image to the south.

l180: Blurs the image to the east.

l

270: Blurs the image to the north.

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a decimalvalue between 0 and 1. For example:
Directional Falloff Ratell

Invert Matte

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from theedge of the character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edgeof the image.

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied toopaque areas of the drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect is applied totransparent or empty areas of the drawing.
Instead of using the colour in the Colour parameters, this uses the colours in thesource drawing to generate the effect.

Use Source Colour

NOTE
The effect of this parameter is only visible in Render View

Multiplicativemode.

Multiplies the colours of the effect with the colours of the background. Thisintensifies the effect.

179

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

ColourRed

The amount of red to subtract from the colour in the background image. To obtaina shadow effect, this value must be negative.

GreenThe amount of green to subtract from the colour in the background image. To
obtain a shadow effect, this value must be negative.

Blue

The amount of blue to subtract from the colour in the background image. To
obtain a shadow effect, this value must be negative.

Alpha

The alpha value of the effect.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker dialog, in which you can visually select a colour for theeffect.

Intensity

Allows you to set the factor by which to multiply the intensity of the effect. Thisparameter can take a decimal value between 0 and 1. At 1, the effect is fully
applied. At 0, the effect is not visible.

180Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Transparency Layer
T-HFND-010-008
The Transparency effect is used to make an image partially transparent. The Transparency effect is usefulwhen fading images in and out, such as a phantom or to make something partially see-through, such as awindow.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

You can enter a value in the Transparency field or change the transparency value over time by linking it to afunction curve. Entering a value of 100 in the Transparency field will make the element 100% transparent, inother words, invisible. Entering a value of 0 will render the element completely opaque.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Transparency

Lets you set the opacity of an element. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of
100 will make the element 100% transparent and a value of 0 will render theelement completely opaque.

181

Chapter 3: Layers

Image Layers
Image layers generate an image that display in your scene's render. The drawing layer, which is the main typeof layer used in Harmony, generates an image based on the drawings in its element which are exposed at thecurrent frame. The Colour-Card simply fills the render area with a solid colour.
Colour-Card Layer

183

Drawing Layer

185

182

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Colour-Card Layer
T-ANIMPA-012-001
The Colour Card allows you to fill the scene's background with a solid colour when there is no backgroundimage. If no drawing or colour-card is present to cover the scene's background, the scene will be rendered on apitch black canvas.

NOTE
By default, the Colour Card has a Z ordering value of 12 Backward. This puts the Colour cardbehind all elements that have a value lower than 12 Backward. Most of the time, the Colour card
will appear automatically behind all the scene elements as they are all set to 0 Backward, unless
you have changed the Z ordering of the scene components. If so, the Colour Card will be in front of
the elements that are pushed back to more than 12 fields backward.

Connection
The Colour Card does not need to be connected to anything in your scene. It simply needs to be added to it
alongside your drawing layers and groups.

Because a Colour Card has a default position on the z-axis of 12 Backward, it will appear behind all the layers
in your scene regardless of whether or not it has layers underneath it.

183Chapter 3: Layers

Layer Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Side and Top
views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

The name of the node as it appears in the Node View and the Timeline view. Eachnode must have a name that is unique to its containing group.

Depth

This parameter can be used to determine whether the colour card displays behindor in front of elements with the same position on the z-axis.

Offset Z

The position of the Colour Card on the Z-axis. By default, this is set to 12 B toensure the Colour Card appears behind other elements in the scene. You can set
this to 0 F to make the Colour Card respect the order of the layers in the Timelineview.

ColourThe colour and transparency of the Colour Card. You can also attach theseparameters to function columns to change their values over time.
Click the colour swatch to open the Colour Picker window and select a colour.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker window in which you can specify the colour.

Invert Matte

If an image is connected to the Colour Card's matte port, by default, the colour isonly applied on the opaque areas of the matte. If this parameter is enabled, thecolour is applied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

184

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Drawing Layer
The Drawing layer is at the core of a scene's structure. A drawing layer is linked to an element, which contains
a series of drawing, and its Xsheet column, which indicates when and for how long each drawing is exposed.
The layer is what connects the element and its exposure to the rendered image. It indicates the position of thedrawings relative to other elements and to the stage, as well as the drawing's connections with pegs, groups
and effects, if any.
Although drawing layers can be transformed and animated on their own, it is typical to connect them under aparent peg. This allows you to keep the position and animation information of the element in the peg, making
it easier to manipulate the exposure and the transformations separately. This is especially useful in digital cutout animation where manipulating and transforming layers is often the main method of simulating movement,
and changing drawings is the secondary method.

You can also connect a drawing layer as a child of another drawing layer. Just like with pegs, anytransformation done to the parent layer, whether on itself or through one of its parents, will also be applied tothe child layer.

Optionally, you can connect a matte drawing to a drawing layer. When a drawing layer has a matte drawing,
only the parts of the drawings that intersect with the opaque areas of the matte drawing will be rendered. This
allows you to accomplish the same effect as connecting the drawing layer to a cutter effect.

Layer Properties
The drawing layer's properties are organized in the following tabs:

185

Chapter 3: LayerslTransformation TablDrawing Tab

Transformation Tab
The Transformation tab contains parameters for adjusting the position, scale, rotation, skew and pivots of anelement.

Parameter

Description
3D Path: Use a 3D path to position the element. A 3D path uses a single function
to define the position on the X, Y and Z axes. This function is made of control
points linked by a curvilinear path, making the movement follow a natural curve.
The pace and ease of the movement is determined by a single velocity function.

Position

Separate: Positions the element using separate functions for the X, Y and Z axes.
This allows to control the direction and pace of the movement across all threeaxes separately. Unless ease is applied to the axes, the trajectory of the element
will follow straight lines going between each keyframe.
Path: If the 3D Path option is selected, this field allows you to create or select the
3D Path function used to position the element.

186

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Path (x) Axis: The position of the element on the East-West axis, in fields.
Path (y) Axis: The position of the element on the South-North axis, in fields.
Path (z) Axis: The position of the element in the Back-Front axis, in fields.
Velocity: If the 3D Path option is selected, this function is used to control the paceat which the element moves towards each control point in the 3D Path function,on all three axes simultaneously.
Locked: Uses a single scale parameter to scale the element, preserving its
Scale

proportions.
Separate: Uses a separate parameter to scale the element on the X and Y axis,
allowing to stretch or squash the element.
(x) Axis: The horizontal scale factor. The default value is 1.
(y) Axis: The vertical scale factor. The default value is 1.

RotationAngle z: The angle at which the element is rotated, based on the 360 degrees
scale. Values below 0 or above 360 degrees will cause the rotation to cycle.

Skew

Skew: The angle at which the element is skewed. This value can range from -90
to 90 degrees.
(x) Axis: The horizontal position of the pivot point of the element relative to thepivot point of the drawing, in fields.
(y) Axis: The vertical position of the pivot point of the element relative to the pivot
point of the drawing, in fields.

Pivot

NOTE
These parameters can be changed visually by clicking and dragging thepivot point when using on of the tools in the Advanced Animation toolbar.

Drawing Tab

187

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

Matte

Invert Matte:If a drawing, group or effect is added to the drawing's Matteattribute, the part of the drawing that intersect with the matte's opaque areas will
be cut out by default. If this parameter is enabled, the part of the drawing thatintersect with the matte's transparent areas will be cut out instead.
Colour Space: The colour space in which the element’s colours should beinterpreted. If the element’s colour space is different from the project colour
space, then the element’s colours will be converted from the element’s colour
space to the project’s colour space as they are processed, before being
composited together with the scene’s special effects.
l

l

l

l

Undefined Colour Space: No colour space is defined for the drawing. The
drawing’s colours will be interpreted as if they were the same colour
space the one selected in the Colour Space tab of the Scene Settings
dialog.
ACES2065-1: An ACES linear colour space that uses the AP0 colour
primaries and is intended for image file interchange.
ACEScg: An ACES linear colour space that uses the AP1 colour primaries
and is intended for CGI rendering and compositing.
Linear Rec.709 (sRGB): The colour space that uses the same primaries
and white point as sRGB and Rec. 709, but with no gamma transfer curve
applied to the colour values.

lColour Space

l

l

l

l

l

Linear Rec. 2020: A colour space used for Ultra High Definition TV(UHDTV). It has a complex gamma transfer curve and primaries that cover
more of the human-perceivable colour space than other colour spaces,
especially in the area of human-perceivable greens.
Linear P3-D65: The same as Display P3, except with no gamma transfer
curve. This colour space is useful for compositing intermediary images
that are meant to be rendered in Display P3.
Display P3: A colour space commonly used for digital projection. It has
the same primaries as DCI-P3, the same white point as sRGB and thesame gamma transfer curve as sRGB.
Rec. 709: The colour space used for HDTV. It has the same primaries andwhite point as sRGB, but has a different gamma transfer curve.
Rec. 709 2.4: The same colour space as Rec. 709 or sRGB, except with agamma transfer curve of 2.4 (per ITU-R BT.1886). This colour space exists
because some editing systems use a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 insteadof the standard gamma curve for Rec. 709.
Rec. 2020:A colour space used for Ultra High Definition TV (UHDTV). It
has a complex gamma transfer curve and primaries that cover more of thehuman-perceivable colour space than other colour spaces, especially in

188

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

the area of human-perceivable greens.
llRec. 2020 2.4: The same colour space as Rec. 2020, except with a simple
gamma transfer curve of 2.4 (per ITU-R BT.1886). This colour space exists
because some editing systems use a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 insteadof the standard gamma curve for Rec. 2020.
sRGB: A colour space typically used for standard computer monitors. It
has the same primaries and white point as Rec. 709, but has a different
gamma transfer curve.

NOTE
In theOpenGL View mode of the Camera view, the colour space ofdrawing layers is ignored and only the colour space of original bitmap files
is taken in account. To test the colours of your drawing in their selectedcolour space, you must activate

189

Render View mode.

Chapter 3: Layers

Move Layers
Move layers are used to animate layers as well as camera motions.
Camera Layer

191

Peg Layer

192

Quadmap Layer

194

190

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Camera Layer
You can setup the camera position by entering coordinates and values in the Layer Properties view.

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Turns the camera layer on or off.

Change Track Colour

The Change Track Colour button lets you change the colour of the exposed
frames; this helps you to quickly locate a layer in the Timeline view. Click the
Change Track Colour button to open the Select Colour window and choose a newcolour. You can modify the colour for any type of layer, such as group, peg,
drawing, and effects.

Name

Displays the current layer name. You can rename the layer by typing in a newlayer name.

Position

Displays the current position of the camera layer using X-axis (East/West), Y-axis(North/South) and Z-axis (Forward/Backward) coordinates. To reposition yourcamera frame, type in the new values corresponding to the desired position
coordinates. You can also use the up and down arrows to set the value of eachfield.

Angle

Displays the current rotation value. To set a new rotation position, type in a new
angle value. You can also use the up and down arrows to set the new angle
value.

Pivot

Displays the current position of the rotation pivot of the camera layer. The camera
will perform a rotation taking the position of the pivot as its angle centre. Bydefault, the pivot is set at the centre of the camera frame. To reposition the pivot
point, enter new X and Y coordinates values in the appropriate field. To see thepivot's position, the Rotate tool must be selected.

191

Chapter 3: Layers

Peg Layer
Find below a description of all the Peg node parameters.

Transformation Tab
Parameter

Description
3D Path: Use a 3D path to position the element. A 3D path uses a single function
to define the position on the X, Y and Z axes. This function is made of control
points linked by a curvilinear path, making the movement follow a natural curve.
The pace and ease of the movement is determined by a single velocity function.
Separate: Positions the element using separate functions for the X, Y and Z axes.
This allows to control the direction and pace of the movement across all threeaxes separately. Unless ease is applied to the axes, the trajectory of the element
will follow straight lines going between each keyframe.

Position

Path: If the 3D Path option is selected, this field allows you to create or select the
3D Path function used to position the element.
Path (x) Axis: The position of the element on the East-West axis, in fields.
Path (y) Axis: The position of the element on the South-North axis, in fields.
Path (z) Axis: The position of the element in the Back-Front axis, in fields.
Velocity: If the 3D Path option is selected, this function is used to control the paceat which the element moves towards each control point in the 3D Path function,on all three axes simultaneously.
Locked: Uses a single scale parameter to scale the element, preserving its
proportions.

Scale

Separate: Uses a separate parameter to scale the element on the X and Y axis,
allowing to stretch or squash the element.
(x) Axis: The horizontal scale factor. The default value is 1.
(y) Axis: The vertical scale factor. The default value is 1.

RotationAngle z: Lets you type in a degree value for the rotation angle. Note that you canenter values greater than 360 and -360 degrees. If you enter 720, the object will
rotate twice.

Skew

Skew: Lets you type in a degree value between -90 to 90 for the skew angle.

Pivot(x) Axis: The horizontal position of the pivot point of the element relative to thepivot point of the drawing, in fields.

192

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide(y) Axis: The vertical position of the pivot point of the element relative to the pivot
point of the drawing, in fields.

193

Chapter 3: Layers

Quadmap Layer
T-COMP2-010-001
The Quadmap transformation layer lets you deform the shape of an element. For example, you can use it tocreate a drop-shadow effect on an element.

You can edit the Quadmap visually in the Camera view.

How to edit the Quadmap in the Camera view
1. In the Timeline view, click the Add Layerbutton and select Quadmap.

2. Connect the drawing you want to deformto the Quadmap.

3. In the Tools toolbar, disable the Animate mode to change the value for the Quadmap over theentire duration of the element.
4. In the Timeline view, click on the Quadmap layer to select it.
5. From the top menu, select View > Show > Control or pressShift + F11.
The quadmap handles appear around the element in the window. There is also a pivot point at thecentre of the quadmap frame that you can reposition.
6. In the Camera view window, use the Transform tool to move the points on the quadmap. Shift +click to select multiple points.

194

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

TIP
The position of the points can be animated. To do this, open the Quadmap layer layer properties
and create functions for each of the coordinates.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to change the name given to the node.

2D PathChanges the X and Y values simultaneously and control the velocity of thechange.

195

Chapter 3: Layers

Separate

Changes the X and Y values separately. Each one can be attached to separate
function curves.

196

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Sound Layer
When you select a sound layer in the Timeline view, the options related to that layer appear in the Layer
Properties view.

If you double-click on a sound layer in the Timeline view, or in a sound column in the Xsheet view, the Sound
Element Editor dialog will open. This dialog allows you to fine-tune the sound track's lip sync, start time, stoptime and volume.

197

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Chapter 4: Tools Properties
Harmony has a wide variety of drawing and manipulation tools and each one of them has a series of options
and modes available in the Tool Properties view. This section covers these options.

Brush Tool Properties

200

Centerline Editor Tool Properties

209

Close Gap Tool Properties

211

Contour Editor Tool Properties

212

Cutter Tool Properties

216

Edit Gradient/Texture Tool Properties

219

Ellipse Tool Properties

220

Envelope Tool Properties

224

Eraser Tool Properties

227

Line Tool Properties

234

Paint Tool Properties

241

Pencil Tool Properties

243

Perspective Tool Properties

248

Polyline Tool Properties

251

Rectangle Tool Properties

255

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

260

Rigging Tool Properties

262

Select Tool Properties

264

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

274

198

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Stamp Tool Properties

276

Stroke Tool Properties

285

Text Tool Properties

287

Transform Tool Properties

290

Zoom Tool Properties

294

199

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties
The Brush tool allows you to draw by creating shapes based on your drawing strokes and filling them withcolour. When used with a tablet, it is pressure sensitive, just like a real life brush.

How to access the Brush tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Brushtool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Brush Properties
The following properties affect the brush's size, smoothing and other properties for the drawing style of yourbrush. Those properties can be saved into brush presets for later use.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

Brush Properties Dialog

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Brush Properties dialog.

200

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the brushproperties, a list of brush presets and other drawing options, the Brush Properties
dialog gives you access to all the available options for your brush's tip and texture.
For more information on the Brush Properties dialog, see the Brush Properties Dialog
section below.
Defines the maximum width of brush strokes.
If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke willvary between its maximum size and minimum size depending on the amount ofpressure used. If used with a mouse, the width of the stroke will always be its
maximum size.

Maximum Size

Brush Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage brush presets.
Icon

Property

Description
By default, Harmony has preloaded brush presets. You can also create
your own brush presets by configuring your brush, then saving its
properties into a new preset. It is also possible to export and importbrush presets.

Presets list

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

201

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:
l

l

l

l

Brush Presets Menu
l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current
tool properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Harmony.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into
an .xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small
thumbnails with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description
When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind202Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected colour.
Auto Fill

When enabled, your brush strokes will only repaint existing artwork andwill not add colour to empty areas. If you repaint semi-transparent
artwork, your artwork will not become more opaque than it already is.
Repaint BrushAuto-Flatten Mode

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of
the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.
Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to selectwhich types of snapping are enabled.

Snapping

If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also
click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping
modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping
modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping mode:lSnap to Alignment Guides: While drawing, the drawing tool
will snap against nearby alignment guides.

203

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Brush Properties Dialog
Brushes have an extensive set of options and properties that are not displayed in the Tool Properties view, butrather, in a dialog you can access from it. To open the Brush Properties dialog, click on the arrow button rightof the stroke display area.

Tip TabThe Tip tab allows you to configure the shape, size, hardness and spacing of your brush tip.
NOTE
The "Size Proportional to Camera" option has been moved to the new Size Properties window.

Property

Description

204Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Brush Tip LibraryThis is where you select the shape of the brush tip. By default it is round.
The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce the thick andthin effect on your stroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke in relation toand as a percentage of the maximum size.

You can control the size properties by clicking on the arrow button on right andthe dialog box will appear as shown below.

Minimum and Maximum Sizell

Pressure: Allows you to apply more pressure and increases the size ofthe brush. You can check the box to invert this behaviour.
Tilt: Allows you to tilt the pen closer to tablet for a bigger stroke. You cancheck the box to invert this behaviour.

205

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

l

l

l

Speed: Allows you to reduce the size of the stroke by drawing at a fast
speed. You can check the box to invert this behaviour.
Speed Sensitivity: A slider is used to control how fast must the stroke bedrawn to reach the minimum value.
Taper: Allows you to reduce the value of a property at the start or theend of each stroke. The value can be expressed using two options:Distance and Percentage. Distance is selected by default. For example:
A taper of 200 will be the same length as the width (diameter) of a strokethat has its size set at 200.

You can enable Start and End Tapering option individually.
lllStart Taper: When distance is selected as a Taper value, the effect ofstart taper can be visualized as the stroke is drawn.
End Taper: When distance or percentage is selected as a Taper value,
the effect of end taper can be visualized once the stroke is complete andvectorized as the length is unknown until the stroke is complete.
Fade Distance: Allows you to fade the value of property over a given
distance. It uses the same units as the size and is applied as the stroke isdrawn.

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating width variation on your stroke. In other words, you would be
forcing a uniform line width using the Maximum Size value.

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape andorientation of the tip.
llRoundness and Angle

Roundness: The vertical scaling to apply to the tip. Reducing this setting
squashes the tip vertically, allowing you to turn round or square tips into
flat tips.
Angle: The angle at which to rotate the brush tip, counterclockwise.

NOTE
The squashing is not relative to the angle—if the tip is rotated, thesquashing will still be done relative to the tip's original orientation.

206

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

If your pen and tablet support tilt sensitivity, this option allows you to set
whether your brush takes your pen's tilt angle into account, and how much.
When your pen is fully tilted, your brush tip will be stretched by the percentage
you set in this parameter, in the angle in which you tilt it. For example, if you set
the Pen Tilt Sensitivity to 50%, and you tilt your pen all the way up or down, yourbrush tip will be stretched vertically by 50%. With the same setting, if you tilt
your pen all the way left or right, your brush tip will be stretched horizontally by
50%.
Pen Tilt Sensitivity

If enabled, your brush tip will rotate with the angle of your pen tip. You can selectone of the following options:lConstant: The static orientation of the brush tip expressed in degrees.

lHeading: The orientation of the brush tip is determined by the direction inwhich the stroke is drawn. It changes dynamically as the stroke is drawn.

lAngle FunctionlAzimuth: When the pen is tilted, it uses the direction in which the pen
eraser is facing.
Twist (if supported by pen): It uses the twist angle of the stylus and is
only available with Wacom Art Pen.

Smoothing Tab
The Smoothing tab contains options to configure how Harmony should automatically smooth your brushstrokes as you paint.

207

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

Centerline Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on the central line of thebrush stroke. A higher setting will prevent your line from being shaky, but is liable toreduce drawing precision and turn sharp angles into curves.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on the outer contour ofthe brush stroke. A higher setting will round sharp corners and reduce the amount ofcontrol points for the resulting vector shape.

208

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Centerline Editor Tool Properties
The Centerline Editor tool allows you to edit brush strokes by their centreline rather than by their contour. This
makes it easier to tweak the tips, curves and corners of brush strokes. The purpose of this tool is to make it aseasy to edit brush strokes as it is to edit pencil lines with the Contour Editor tool.

How to access the Centerline Editor tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Centerline Editor

tool.

2. The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple
elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements bydrawing an irregular closed shape around them withyour mouse.

lMarquee: Allows you to select multiple elements
by drawing a rectangle around them. This is faster, as
you only need to drag your mouse from one corner ofthe rectangle to its opposite corner, but it may not be as
precise as you want.

Selection ModeTIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
the other selection mode.

Show Centerline Editor Controls

When enabled, selecting several control points will make amanipulator bounding box appear. You can use thismanipulator to scale and rotate the selection of points.

209

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Centerline Smoothness

Allows you to adjust the amount of control points on thecentreline that is generated from the selected stroke. A lower
value will create a centreline with less points, which makes it
easier to manipulate large lengths of the stroke, and a higher
value will generate a centreline with more points, allowing you
to tweak details.

210Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Close Gap Tool Properties
The paint tool requires the area you attempt to fill to be closed in order to know exactly what area of yourartwork must be filled. However, it is common for artists to accidentally leave small gaps in their artwork.
The Close Gap tool allows you to quickly close small gaps in a shape by creating an invisible stroke connecting
two extremities of the gap. You can then fill the area using the Paint tool, as this invisible stroke will be takenin account to determine the outline of the shape to fill.
TIP
You do not need to use the Close Gap tool with precision. If you draw a crude stroke near the gap
you want to close, the tool will automatically detect the two closest line extremities and will draw
an invisible straight line connecting them. closing the gap between them.

How to access the Close Gap tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Close Gap

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

The Close Gap tool creates an invisible drawing stroke to close the shape.
Enabling this option will merge the stroke into the artwork instead of adding thestroke on top of it.
Auto Flatten

NOTE
The area you close with the Close Gap tool will be fillable regardless ofwhether or not this option is enabled.

211

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Contour Editor Tool Properties
The Contour Editor lets you reshape vector shapes, brush strokes and lines in your drawings.
Artwork in Harmony is made of vector shapes. Vector shapes are defined by points, the lines joining the points
together (contours) and the curve vectors, represented by Bezier handles, which make the curve of said lines.

The Contour Editor tool allows you to select a contour or point, and change the position of points, add andremove points from the shape, rotate, lengthen and shorten curve handles to influence the curve of contours
between those points, or drag contours between points to change their curve directly.

How to access the Contour Editor tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Contour Editor

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Modes
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple
elements:
Selection ModelLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements bydrawing an irregular closed shape around them with yourmouse.

lMarquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by212

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

drawing a rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only
need to drag your mouse from one corner of the rectangle toits opposite corner, but it may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use theother selection mode.

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as toselect which types of snapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You canalso click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable allsnapping modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable
the snapping modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnap to Contour: When enabled, moving the control point
in a contour near another contour will snap that control
point against that contour. This will lock the point and thecontour together, and moving the control point will deformthe contour.

Snapping

This option can be especially useful if you need to makes theedges of two shapes snap together, like so:

You can also use this option to make a control point snap
against another control point, allowing you to join lines
together.

213

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

NOTE
When a control point is snapped against a contour
or another control point in your drawing, the Contour
Editor will manipulate them together. However,even if you make a point in one drawing stroke snap
against another drawing stroke, they will remain
separate drawing strokes unless they are flattened
together, and you will still be able to manipulatethem individually with the Select

l

l

tool.

Snap to Alignment Guides: While moving the selection or
one of its control points, it will snap against nearbyalignment guides.
Snap and Align: Snaps the selected anchor point to any
existing line while displaying temporary rulers as a guidethat you can also snap your anchor point to.

When enabled, selecting several control points will make amanipulator bounding box appear. You can use this manipulator toscale and rotate the selection of points.
Show Contour Editor
Controls

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

Smooth Selection

The Smooth operation lets you smooth out selected drawing
strokes and remove extra points.

214

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

TIP
You can also smooth the selection by selecting Drawing>
Optimize > Smooth from the top menu or by pressing Alt +Shift + S.

215

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Cutter Tool Properties
The Cutter tool lets you cut out part of a drawing so that you can transform it, copy it or delete it. It also allows
you to trim overshot lines.

How to access the Cutter tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, click and hold on the Selectthe Cutter

tool to display the menu beneath and selecttool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing anirregular closed shape around them with your mouse.

lSelection Mode

Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to drag yourmouse from one corner of the rectangle to its opposite corner, but it
may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the otherselection mode.

Easy Drag

When enabled, you can drag the selection by clicking anywhere inside its
bounding box. By default, you must click on the artwork in the selection to beable to drag it.

216Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

When this option is enabled along with the Lasso

selection type, quickly

drawing a line with the Cutter tool over a line segment in your artwork will
instantly delete it. This can be useful if you want to use the Cutter tool toquickly clean up your artwork.

Use Mouse
GestureIt allows you to cut in two modes as follows:llSingle Line Cutting Gesture: It deletes first line segment over whicha straight gesture is drawn with the cutter.
Multiple Lines Cutting Gesture: It deletes all line segments overwhich a straight gesture is drawn with the cutter.

NOTE
This option will only work when using the Cutter tool on separate
brush or pencil strokes. Hence, it is important not to flatten yourartwork if you intend to use this option to clean up your drawings. This
option has no effect on bitmap layers as the artwork in bitmap layers isalways flattened.

By default, the tool only works on the currently selected layer. Whenenabled, the tool will work on all the visible layers in the Camera view.
Apply to Visible
Drawing Layers

NOTES
l

l

When this option is disabled, you can select several layers to use
the tool on all the selected layers simultaneously.
This option only works in the Camera view.

217Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees
CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees
CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

218

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Edit Gradient/Texture Tool Properties
The Edit/Gradient Texture tool allows you to move, rotate and scale a gradient or texture fill within the shapeit fills, without modifying the shape itself.

How to access the Edit Gradient/Texture tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Edit Gradient/Texture

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

By default, the tool only works on the currently selected layer. Whenenabled, the tool will work on all the visible layers in the Camera view.
Apply to Visible
Drawing Layers

NOTES
l

l

When this option is disabled, you can select several layers to use
the tool on all the selected layers simultaneously.
This option only works in the Camera view.

219

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Ellipse Tool Properties
The Ellipse tool allows you to quickly draw an ellipse or a circle.

How to access the Ellipse tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Ellipse

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.

220

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

Description

Harmony provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and importthose that others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:lll

Brush Presets Menulll

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current
tool properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Harmony.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.

221

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

DescriptionllLarge Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your shape is added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen.

When enabled, the shape you draw is automatically filled with theselected colour. By default, drawing a shape only creates its outlines.

Auto Fill

Snapping

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to selectwhich types of snapping are enabled.

222

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also
click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping
modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping
modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnap to Contour: When enabled, while you're drawing, themouse cursor will snap to the nearby contours of the artwork inyour drawing.

l

l

l

Snap to Alignment Guides: While drawing, the drawing tool
will snap against nearby alignment guides.
Snap and Align: When enabled, while you're drawing, themouse cursor will automatically align to the rectangularbounding boxes of other strokes and shapes in your drawing.
Snap to Grid: While moving the selection, the mouse cursor will
snap against the intersecting points of the grid.

TIP
To display the grid, select View > Grid > Show Grid fromthe top menu or press Ctrl + '.

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of
the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

223

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Envelope Tool Properties
Selecting the Envelope tool displays its properties and options in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Increase the width and height values to add more columns and rows to thedeformation grids.

Width andHeight

Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to select multiple items bydrawing a lasso around them.
Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt key totemporarily use Marquee mode.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to select multiple items
by drawing a rectangle around them.

224

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt key totemporarily use Lasso mode.

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all other animationand drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to select which types ofsnapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up menu in
which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also click on thisbutton to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping modes, and click on it
again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping modes which were previously
enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnappinglllSnap to Contour: While moving the selection or one of its control
points, it will snap against the nearby points and contours of yourartwork, allowing you to snap parts of your artwork together.
Snap to Alignment Guides: While moving the selection or one of its
control points, it will snap against nearby alignment guides.
Snap and Align: When enabled, while moving a selection, therectangular bounding box of the selection will snap to the rectangularbounding box of any other drawing stroke in the drawing, allowing you
to align drawing strokes laterally.
Allow Snapping on all Drawing Layers: If toggled on, the selections
can be snapped to all bounding boxes, nearby points, and contours ofartwork on any layer.

To display more controls,you can click on the Show Advanced Controls button.

Show Advanced
Controls

225

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90
Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90
Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

SmoothYou can modify the central line smoothness of your line using this option. Thisparameter smooths the deformed lines. Increasing the value will result in asmoother line with fewer control points. The more you increase the value, theless details and curves you will get. Use the left and right arrows to increment
the value by one full unit. Use the Up - Down slider to quickly increment thevalue.

226

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Eraser Tool Properties
The Eraser tool allows you to erase artwork by drawing eraser strokes over it. When using the Eraser tool witha tablet, it is pressure sensitive, like with the Brush tool.

How to access the Eraser tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Eraser

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Eraser Properties
The way the Eraser tool is configured is almost identical to the way the Brush tool is configured.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Stroke Preview Area

Eraser Properties
Dialog

The arrow button right of the display area opens the Eraser Properties dialog, which
gives you access to all the parameters and options for your eraser. The Tool Properties
view only gives you access to a few of the eraser properties, a list of eraser presets andoptions for the Eraser tool that are not related to the eraser properties. For more

227

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

information on the Eraser Properties dialog, see the Eraser Properties Dialog section
below.

Defines the maximum size of the eraser.
If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary
between its maximum size and minimum size depending on the amount of pressureused. If used with a mouse, the width of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Maximum Size

Eraser Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage eraser presets.
Icon

Property

Description
By default, Harmony has preloaded eraser presets. You can also

Presets list

create your own eraser presets by configuring your eraser, thensaving its properties into a new preset. It is also possible to export
and import eraser presets.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of theirtip.

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and apreview of their tip.

228

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke
done with each preset.

Eraser Properties Dialog
Erasers have an extensive set of options and properties that are not displayed in the Tool Properties view, butrather, in a dialog you can access from it. To open the Eraser Properties dialog, click on the arrow button rightof the stroke display area.

The Eraser Properties dialog has two tabs. Below is detailed information about the options available in eachtab:l

Tip Tab on page 229

lSmoothing Tab on page 232

Tip TabThe Tip tab allows you to configure the shape, size, hardness and spacing of your eraser tip.

229

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

Eraser Tip LibraryThis is where you select the shape of the eraser tip. By default, it is round.
The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce the thick and thineffect on your stroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke in relation to and as apercentage of the maximum size.

You can control the size properties by clicking on the arrow button on right and the
dialog box will appear as shown below.

Minimum andMaximum Sizel

Pressure: Allows you to apply more pressure and increases the size of thebrush. You can check the box to invert this behaviour.

230

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

l

l

l

l

Tilt: Allows you to tilt the pen closer to tablet for a bigger stroke. You can checkthe box to invert this behaviour.
Speed: Allows you to reduce the size of the stroke by drawing at a fast speed.
You can check the box to invert this behaviour.
Speed Sensitivity: A slider is used to control how fast must the stroke bedrawn to reach the minimum value.
Taper: Allows you to reduce the value of a property at the start or the end ofeach stroke. The value can be expressed using two options: Distance andPercentage. Distance is selected by default. For example: A taper of 200 willbe the same length as the width (diameter) of a stroke that has its size set at200.

You can enable Start and End Tapering option individually.
lllStart Taper: When distance is selected as a Taper value, the effect of starttaper can be visualized as the stroke is drawn.
End Taper: When distance or percentage is selected as a Taper value, theeffect of end taper can be visualized once the stroke is complete and vectorized
as the length is unknown until the stroke is complete.
Fade Distance: Allows you to fade the value of property over a given distance.
It uses the same units as the size and is applied as the stroke is drawn.

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating
width variation on your stroke. In other words, you would be forcing a uniform line
width using the Maximum Size value.

Proportional to Camera

If you check this option, the size of the eraser will be adjusted to the position of thecamera on the z-axis. This means that if the camera is zoomed in on the scene, theeraser will be proportionally smaller so that it appears the same size in the rendered
image. Likewise, if the camera is zoomed out, the eraser will be proportionally bigger.
The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape and orientationof the tip.

Roundness and AnglellRoundness: The vertical scaling to apply to the tip. Reducing this setting
squashes the tip vertically, allowing you to turn round or square tips into flat
tips.
Angle: The angle at which to rotate the brush tip, counterclockwise.

231

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

NOTE
The squashing is not relative to the angle—if the tip is rotated, the squashing will
still be done relative to the tip's original orientation.

If your pen and tablet support tilt sensitivity, this option allows you to set whether youreraser takes your pen's tilt angle in account, and how much.
When your pen is fully tilted, your eraser tip will be stretched by the percentage you
set in this parameter, in the angle in which you tilt it. For example, if you set the Pen Tilt
Sensitivity to 50%, and you tilt your pen all the way up or down, your eraser tip will be
stretched vertically by 50%. With the same setting, if you tilt your pen all the way leftor right, your eraser tip will be stretched horizontally by 50%.
Pen Tilt Sensitivity

If enabled, and if your pen and tablet support tip rotation, your eraser tip will rotatewith the angle of your pen tip.

Use Pen Rotation

Smoothing Tab
The Smoothing tab contains options to configure how Harmony should automatically smooth your eraser
strokes as you paint.

232

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

Centerline Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on your eraser stroke's
direction, curves and corners. A higher setting will prevent your line from being
shaky, but is liable to reduce drawing precision and turn sharp angles into curves.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on outer contour of theeraser stroke. A higher setting will round sharp corners and reduce the amount ofcontrol points for the resulting vector shape.

233

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Line Tool Properties
The Line tool allows you to quickly draw a line segment by dragging the mouse from its starting point to its
end point.

How to access the Line tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Linetool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.

234

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Tool Name

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the line.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

Description

Harmony provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and importthose that others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:lll

Brush Presets Menulll

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current
tool properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Harmony.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.

235

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

DescriptionllLarge Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existing artwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as you draw it,
until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen.

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all other animationand drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to select which types ofsnapping are enabled.

Snapping

If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up menu in
which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also click on this button
to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping modes, and click on it again andtoggle it on to re-enable the snapping modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnap to Contour: When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse
cursor will automatically snap to the nearby contours of existing artwork,
allowing you to draw shapes that connect with other parts of yourdrawing.

236

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

NOTE
If you draw a line with the Line tool and make its tip snap to acontour or another control point in your artwork, they will belocked together. You can then manipulate both simultaneously
using theContour Editor tool. You can also separate two

drawing strokes that have been snapped together by selecting oneof them with thellSelect tool and moving it away.

Snap to Alignment Guides: While drawing, the drawing tool will snap
against nearby alignment guides.
Snap and Align: When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor
will automatically align with the edges of strokes and shapes in yourartwork, allowing you to draw shapes that align with parts of yourdrawing.

l

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will snap against
the intersecting points of the grid.

TIP
To display the grid, select View > Grid > Show Grid from the top
menu or press Ctrl + '.

Auto-Flatten
Mode

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate drawing
object, which can be edited independently from other parts of the artwork. Whenenabled, the Auto-Flatten option automatically merges strokes into existing237

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description

artwork.

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with the AutoFlatten mode are essentially cut into segments by the overlap and can betreated as individual lines.

When enabled, small gaps between the pencil lines you draw will be closed byan invisible stroke to make sure your shapes are closed and that they can be
filled with the Paint tool.
When drawing contours with pencil lines, the centreline is used to determine
whether or not the contour is closed, but the visible tips of the pencil line will

Auto-Close
Gap

extend a bit beyond the tips of its centreline, making it possible to have shapesthat appear closed, but are not really. This can prevent the shape from being
filled with the Paint tool. Enabling this option when drawing with the Pencil orLine tool will prevent you from leaving invisible gaps in your contours.

Draws a straight line.
Straight LineMode

In this mode, you can draw curved lines with the following method:
1. Draw the line by clicking and dragging from the start point to the end
point of the line, but don’t release the mouse button or pen yet.

238

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

2. While holding the mouse button or pen down, press and hold the Ctrl
(Windows) or ⌘ (macOS) and move the mouse or pen to define the line’s
curve.

3. Once the line’s curve looks right, release the mouse button or pen.
This mode allows you to draws a simple curved (quadratic Bezier) line in two
clicks:1. Draw the line by clicking and dragging from the start point to the end
point of the line.

Curve Line
Mode
2. Move the mouse or pen to define the curve of the line and click.

S Curve LineMode

Draws an S-shaped (cubic Bezier) line. This mode allows you to draw lines withfinely tuned or even S-shaped curves with three clicks:
1. Draw the line by clicking and dragging from the start point to the end
point of the line.

239

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description

2. Move the mouse or pen to define the Bezier position of the beginning of
the line and click.

3. Move the mouse or pen to define the Bezier position of the end of the line
and click.

Pencil Properties Dialog

240

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Paint Tool Properties
The Paint tool allows you to fill closed areas of your drawing with the selected colour.

How to access the Paint tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Paint, Paint Unpainted

or Unpainttool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Paint Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing anirregular closed shape around them with your mouse.

lMarquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to drag yourmouse from one corner of the rectangle to its opposite corner, but it may
not be as precise as you want.

Selection
Mode

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the other selectionmode.

The Paint tool has three different modes:lPaint: Paints or repaints selected zones, whether or not they are
already filled.

Paint ModelPaint Unpainted: Only paints empty zones, and does not repaintzones that are already filled with colour.

lUnpaint: Removes colour from the selected zone, replacing it withtransparency.

241

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

This option allows you to determine which drawings in the current layer the tool
should affect. It can be toggled on or off. When toggled on, it has two different
modes. You can select a mode by clicking and holding on the button.
ll

Off: When this button is toggled off, the tool only works on the drawing
in the current frame.
Apply to All Frames: The tool will work on every exposed drawing inthe selected layer simultaneously.

lApply to Onion Skin Range: The tool will work on every drawing
displayed in the Onion Skin. Onion Skin must be enabled for this option
to work.

Apply to All
FramesBy default, if you attempt to fill a shape that has a small gap in its contour, thePaint tool will not be able to fill the shape. This option allows you to make the
Paint tool automatically add a stroke to close the shape when it detects a small
gap between two strokes in the shape.
The Close Gap setting can be set to a value between 0 and 10. This determines
the maximum size of a gap to close, in pixels. You can also use one of thefollowing presets:
Close Gapll

No Close Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 0, disabling the feature.
Close Small Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 2, making the Paint
tool close gaps that are barely visible.

l

Close Medium Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 4, making the Paint
tool close gaps that are somewhat visible.

l

Close Large Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 8, making the Paint
tool close gaps that are easy to notice.

242

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Pencil Tool Properties
The Pencil tool allows you to draw simple contour lines that are defined by their centerline and their thickness.
When you select the Pencil tool, the Tool Properties view displays the different Pencil modes that control how
the pencil line is drawn.

How to access the Pencil tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Pencil

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
The following properties affect the pencil's width and smoothing. Those properties can be saved into pencil
presets for later use.

243

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line.

Centerline Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

Description

Harmony provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and importthose that others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:ll

Brush Presets Menu

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current
tool properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Harmony.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.

244Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

l

l

l

Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected colour.
Auto Fill245

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.
Trim Extra Lines

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.

Align Handles After
Trim

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of
the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto Flatten

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

Snapping

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to selectwhich types of snapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up

246

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also
click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping
modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping
modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping mode:lSnap to Alignment Guides: While drawing, the drawing tool
will snap against nearby alignment guides.

247

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Perspective Tool Properties
The perspective tool allows you to deform artwork by creating a rectangular bounding box around it andallowing you to manipulate any of the four corners. The selected artwork will be deformed to fit the shape you
make by simulating a perspective effect.

How to access the Perspective tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Perspectivetool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Perspective Tool Options
Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing
an irregular closed shape around them with your mouse.

lSelection Mode

Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements bydrawing a rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only
need to drag your mouse from one corner of the rectangle toits opposite corner, but it may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the otherselection mode.

Snapping

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as toselect which types of snapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also248Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping
modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping
modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnap to Contour: While moving the selection or one of its
control points, it will snap against the nearby points andcontours of your artwork, allowing you to snap parts of yourartwork together.

llSnap to Alignment Guides: While moving the selection or oneof its control points, it will snap against nearby alignment
guides.
Snap and Align: When enabled, while moving a selection, therectangular bounding box of the selection will snap to therectangular bounding box of any other drawing stroke in thedrawing, allowing you to align drawing strokes laterally.

Allows you to select between one of the two following deformation
modes:l

Perspective: Deforms the selection by simulating aperspective effect.

l

Lattice: Deforms the selection by simply making theartwork fit the bounding box, without applying a perspective
effect.

Deformation Mode

The difference between both modes becomes easier to understand if
you apply a transformation to a drawing of a grid to make it look likeit's laid down on a surface:

Flip Horizontal

Flips the selection horizontally.

Operations

249

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Flip Vertical

Flips the selection vertically.

Rotate 90 CW

Rotates the selection 90° clockwise.

Rotate 90 CCW

Rotates the selection 90° counterclockwise.

250

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Polyline Tool Properties
The Polyline tool allows you to draw complex lines or shapes by defining each point and their Bezier handles
one by one.

How to access the Polyline tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Polyline

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Description

Preview Area

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

251

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties
dialog.

Pencil Properties
DialogSize

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to the pencil size,
a list of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties
dialog gives you access to all the available options for your pencil's
shape and texture. For more information on the Pencil Properties dialog,
see the Polyline Tool Properties section below.
Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.

Pencil Presets
Icon

Property

Description

Presets list

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.

New Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Presets Menu

Gives access to more options for managing presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

252

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of their tip.

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and apreview of their tip.

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke donewith each preset.

Drawing Options
Icon

Property

Description
When this option is enabled, clicking close to a contour in your drawing
will add the point to that contour. The line you are building will be linked
to that contour.

Snap to Contour

If this option is disabled, attempting to click on existing contours will
always create a point very close to that contour, but not exactly on it.
Therefore, it is necessary to enable this mode if you want to create linesthat branch from into existing contours in your drawing.

NOTE
If you draw a line with the Line tool and make its tip snap to acontour or another control point in your artwork, they will belocked together. You can then manipulate both simultaneously
using theContour Editor tool. You can also separate two

drawing strokes that have been snapped together by selecting
one of them with theAuto Fill

Select tool and moving it away.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected colour.

253

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.
Trim Extra Lines

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.
Align Handles After
Trim

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of
the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

254

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Rectangle Tool Properties
The Rectangle tool allows you to quickly draw a rectangle or a square.

How to access the Rectangle tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Rectangle

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.

255

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your shape is added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen.

When enabled, the shape you draw is automatically filled with theselected colour. By default, drawing a shape only creates its outlines.

Auto Fill

256

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to selectwhich types of snapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also
click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping
modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping
modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnappinglllSnap to Contour: When enabled, while you're drawing, themouse cursor will snap to the nearby contours of the artwork inyour drawing.
Snap to Alignment Guides: While drawing, the drawing tool
will snap against nearby alignment guides.
Snap and Align: When enabled, while you're drawing, themouse cursor will automatically align to the rectangularbounding boxes of other strokes and shapes in your drawing.
When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will snap
against the intersecting points of the grid.

TIP
To display the grid, select View > Grid > Show Grid fromthe top menu or press Ctrl + '.

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of
the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.
Auto Flatten Mode

257

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

Description

Harmony provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and importthose that others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:lll

Brush Presets Menu

l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current
tool properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Harmony.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,

258

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

with their name and a preview of their tip.
lStroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

259

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties
When you use the Reposition All Drawings tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

OptionDescription

Easy Drag

When enabled, you can drag the selection by clicking anywhere inside its
bounding box. By default, you must click on the artwork in the selection to be able
to drag it.

Operations
Icon

OptionDescription

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90
Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90
Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields to enter specific values andprecisely reposition the selected shape.
Offset X and Y

1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the X-

260

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

OptionDescriptionaxis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the Yaxis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value in
the X or Y value field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields to enter specific values to resize
the selected shape with precision.

Width and Height

1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize the width of your selection.
2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize the height of your selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value in
the Width or Height fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or unlock the ratio between the
Width and Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specific values and accurately rotate theselected shape.

Angle
1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field to rotate your selection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value in
the Angle value field.

261

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Rigging Tool Properties
In the Tool Properties view, you can customize not only the behaviour of the tool but also the settings of thedeformers that you will create.

Mode
ButtonName

Description

Bone Mode

Sets the Rigging tool to create Bone deformations.

Game Bone Mode

Sets the Rigging tool to create Game Bone deformations.

Options
ButtonParameter

Description

Show All Manipulators

Lets you immediately see the resting position in red (Setup) and theanimated position in green.

262

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Operations
ButtonName

Description

Reset Deform (Reset Current
Keyframe)

Copies the resting position of the deformation skeleton to thecurrent frame.

263

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Select Tool Properties
The Select tool lets you select strokes and apply basic transformations such as repositioning, rotating, scalingor skewing, using the different handles of the bounding box.
If you have text or pencil lines selected with the Select tool, their properties will display in the Tool Properties
view, allowing you to make changes to your selection.

How to access the Select tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select either the Selecttool or the Select by Colour

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

NOTE
Selecting the Select by Colour

tool from the Tools toolbar activates the Select tool, with theSelect by Colour option enabled. Hence, this topic covers the tool properties for both the Selectand Select by Colour tools.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple
elements:
Selection ModelLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements bydrawing an irregular closed shape around them with yourmouse.

264

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

DescriptionlMarquee: Allows you to select multiple elements bydrawing a rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only
need to drag your mouse from one corner of the rectangle toits opposite corner, but it may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use theother selection mode.

Easy Drag

When enabled, you can drag the selection by clicking anywhere
inside its bounding box. By default, you must click on the artwork inthe selection to be able to drag it.
Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as toselect which types of snapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You canalso click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable allsnapping modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable
the snapping modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:lSnappingllSnap to Contour: While moving the selection or one of its
control points, it will snap against the nearby points andcontours of your artwork, allowing you to snap parts of yourartwork together.
Snap to Alignment Guides: While moving the selection or
one of its control points, it will snap against nearbyalignment guides.
Snap and Align: While moving the selection, the rectangularbounding box of the selection will align with the rectangularbounding boxes of other strokes and shapes in your artwork.
If you move one of your selection's control points, it will alsoalign with the bounding boxes of other strokes and shapes inyour artwork.

265

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

DescriptionlSnap to Grid: While moving the selection, the mouse cursor
will snap against the intersecting points of the grid.

TIP
To display the grid, select View > Grid > Show Gridfrom the top menu or press Ctrl + '.

l

Allow Snapping on all Drawing Layers: If toggled on, theselections can be snapped to all bounding boxes, nearby
points, and contours of artwork on any layer.

When enabled, the width of pencil lines will be adjusted when
scaling them with the Select tool.
Scale Pencil Line
Thickness

TIP
You can quickly enable this mode by selecting the Scale
Pencil Line Thickness

tool, in the Selecttool'sproperties dialog.

Select by Colour

When enabled, clicking on a coloured zone in your artwork will
instantly select all the zones that are filled with the same colour.
Select by Colour

266

can also be accessed from the Tools toolbar.

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

NOTE
Only the zones painted with the same colour swatch in yourpalette will be selected. If another zone is coloured with theexact same colour, but not the same colour swatch, it will not
be selected.

By default, the tool only works on the currently selected layer.
When enabled, the tool will work on all the visible layers in the
Camera view.

Apply to Visible Drawing
Layers

NOTES
l

l

267

When this option is disabled, you can select several
layers to use the tool on all the selected layers
simultaneously.
This option only works in the Camera view.

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Smooth out selected drawing strokes and remove extra points.
SmoothMerges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If you
draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it
can be useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines
are drawn one on top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines
or modify their shape, it will be easier if they are flattened.

FlattenCreate Colour Art fromLine Art

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded
layers (line art, colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible
strokes to paint your drawings on separate layers. This provides
more inking and painting flexibility.
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on268

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

any of the four embedded layers.

Distribute to Layers

The Distribute to Layers option is used to separate the selected art
strokes and send them to new drawing layers. In the Camera view,
once you have drawn your artwork, you can select the strokes you
want to distribute using the Select tool and click on the Distribute toLayers button; you can also select Drawing > Distribute to Layers. It
will automatically take every stroke from the drawing selection madein the Camera view and separate them into a different layer for each.
If an artwork is composed of several strokes, you must group themusing Edit > Group > Group before using the Distribute to Layers
option. This option cannot be done from the Drawing view.
Converts the selected centre line pencil strokes into contour strokes
brush lines.

Pencil to Brush

Offset X

Lets you enter a value to reposition the selection along the X-axis.

Offset Y

Lets you enter a value to reposition the selection along the Y-axis.

Width

Lets you enter a value to resize the width of the selection.

HeightLets you enter a value to resize the height of the selection.

Lock

Locks or unlocks the ratio between the Width and Height values.

Angle

Lets you enter specific values to rotate the selection. A positive value
rotates the selection counter clockwise and a negative value rotates
the selection clockwise.

269

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Pencil Selection
If the selection contains pencil lines, the Pencil Selection section appears at the bottom of the Tool Properties
view, allowing you to adjust the size of those pencil lines.

Icon

Property

Description

Size

Adjusts the width of the selected pencil lines.

Text Selection
If your selection include text boxes created with the Text tool, a Text Selection section will appear at thebottom of the Tool Properties view, allowing you to adjust the formatting of the whole text box.
TIP
You can also adjust the formatting of parts of the text in the text box using the Text tool.

Icon

Property

Description

Lets you select the font in which to display the text.
Font

Bold

Makes the selected text bold.

270

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Makes the selected text italic.
ItalicAligns the text in the selected text box to the left.

Align Left

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the centre.

Align Center

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the right.

Align Right

Justify

Makes the text in the selected text box take all the horizontal space byadjusting the spacing between each word. Text that use a single line
and text in the last line of a paragraph is aligned to the left.

271

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to set the size of the selected text.
Size

Allows you to increase or decrease the spacing between eachcharacter.

Kerning

Auto Kern

Sets the kerning automatically based on the font’s predefined
standard.
Allows you to increase or decrease the indentation of the first line oftext in each paragraph.

IndentLine Spacing

Increases or decreases the space between each line of text.

272

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description273

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Smooth Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Smooth Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Smoothing Style options allow you to smooth aportion of your drawing by tracing a smoothing strokeover the zone to optimize or by selecting an area ofthe drawing with the Marquee or Lasso.
Note that by default, the Smooth Editor tool colour isyellow, it was changed to orange for screen grab
clarity.

Smoothing Style

The Show Control Points option allows you to showor hide the Bezier points around lines. When the
Bezier points are displayed, you can see the result ofyour smoothing and the number of points left on the
curve. When it is turned off, only the original artwork
is displayed.

Show Control Points

This is where you set the minimum and maximum
sizes of your drawing tool which will produce the thickand thin effect on your stroke. This works with thepressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.

Minimum Size andMaximum Size

This options is available while using the Brush
Smoothingl274

style.

Maximum and Minimum Size: Defines the
maximum and minimum width of the stroke.

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guidel

Up/Down arrows: Use the up and downarrows to set the minimum and maximum sizevalue.

The Smoothness impacts the strength of thesmoothing result. The higher the value, the morepoints are removed and the smoother the curve. The
Smoothness range is from 0 to 100; the default value
is 20.

Smoothness

You can modify the colour of the control points
displayed on the artwork while working with the
Smooth Editor tool by double-clicking on the colour
swatch.

Colour275

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Stamp Tool Properties
The Stamp tool allows you to create and use stamps, which can contain one or several drawings that can be
stamped individually or in sequence onto your artwork.

How to access the Stamp tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Stamptool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Stamp Properties
The following options allow you, among other things, to preview your stamp, to change the size of your stamp
as well as to flip it horizontally and vertically.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of what will appear if you draw a stroke with the
Stamp tool.
Preview Area

276

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Stamp Properties dialog.

Stamp Properties
DialogWhile the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the stamp properties and alist of stamp presets, the Stamp Properties dialog gives you access to all the available options
for the way your stamp will be applied. For more information on the Stamp Properties dialog,
see the Stamp Properties Dialog on page 280 section below.
The two-ended arrows to the left and over the Stamp thumbnail allow you to flip the stamp
horizontally or vertically.

Flip Horizontally/ Flip Vertically

The maximum scaling factor to apply to the stamp before stamping it onto the drawing.
This setting is a percentage, which is relative to the size of the original drawing that was used
to create the stamp. This means that, at 100%, the drawing will be stamped into your artwork
in its original size.
Maximum Scale

NOTE
If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive tablet, the scale of the stamp can be made to
be relative to the amount of pressure you put on your pen. To do this, you must reducing
the Minimum Scale property of your stamp in the Stamp Properties dialog. If the
Minimum Scale setting is left at its default value, which is 100%, the size of the stamp
will not vary.

Stamp

When using a multi-drawing stamp, this is the number of the drawing in the series that will
be stamped on the next time you use the Stamp tool. For example, if your stamp has 3
drawings and this is set to 2, the next drawing that will be stamped on is the second drawing
in the series.
If your stamp's Cycle setting is set to Hold, then you have to use this slider to select which277

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

drawing to stamp with the Stamp tool.
If your stamp's Reset Cycle for Each Stroke option is enabled, then you can use this slider toselect which drawing to start each stroke with.
Otherwise, when you draw a stroke with the Stamp tool, the Stamp slider will automatically
update to the next drawing in the sequence.

TIP
You can also cycle through the drawings in your stamp by using the Left Arrow and Right
Arrow keys.

NOTE
The Cycle and Reset Cycle for Each Strokee options are available in the Stamp
Properties dialog.

Stamp Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage stamp presets.
Contrary to the Brush and Pencil tools, creating a Stamp preset is required to use the Stamp tool, as thispreset will contain the drawings to stamp onto your artwork. A Stamp preset is created by selecting one orseveral layers, then adding a preset to the Stamp Presets list. If several layers are selected, the Stamp willcontain a series of drawings, which it will stamp onto your artwork in a sequence as you draw strokes with the
Stamp tool.
Icon

Property

Description

Presets list

The list of Stamp presets. Click on one of the presets to select it anduse it in your drawing.
Creates a new Stamp preset based on the selected artwork. The
artwork can either be a selection made with the Selecttool, or by

selecting a layer.
New Brush Preset

If several layers are selected, this will create a multi-drawing Stamp.
As you draw a stroke with the Stamp tool using a multi-drawing
stamp, each drawing in the stamp will be applied onto your artwork,
one after the other.

278

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains all of the previous options, along with allof the following options:lll

Brush Presets Menu
l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new stamp based on theselected artwork.
Rename Preset:Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes:Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Harmony.
Export Brushes:Allows you to export your brush presets into
an .xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small
thumbnails with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork
Icon

Property

Description
When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen.

279

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and all otheranimation and drawing tools that support snapping, as well as to selectwhich types of snapping are enabled.

Snapping

If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a pop-up
menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You can also
click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable all snapping
modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to re-enable the snapping
modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping mode:lSnap to Alignment Guides: While drawing, the drawing tool
will snap against nearby alignment guides.

Stamp Properties Dialog
The Stamp Properties dialog allows you to set more specific settings for your stamp, such as pressure
sensitivity, spacing, angle, randomness and, for multi-drawing stamps, how to cycle through each drawing inthe stamp. To open the Stamp Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right of the stroke display area.

280

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

The maximum scaling factor to apply to the stamp before stamping it onto the drawing.
Maximum Scale

This setting is a percentage, which is relative to the size of the original drawing that wasused to create the stamp. This means that, at 100%, the drawing will be stamped into yourartwork in its original size.
The minimum scaling factor to apply to the stamp before stamping it onto your drawing.
When using the Stamp tool with a pressure-sensitive pen tablet, the size of the stamps
applied onto your artwork will vary between its Minimum Scale and Maximum Scale
properties, relative to the amount of pressure you apply to the pen.

Minimum Scale

This setting is relative to the Maximum Scale property. This means that if the Maximum
Scale is set to 50% and the Minimum Scale is set to 50%, the actual scaling factor applied tothe stamp will vary between 25% and 50%.
This setting is also used with the Random Size setting.

281

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

The two-ended arrows to the left and over the Stamp thumbnail allow you to flip the stamp
horizontally or vertically.

Flip Horizontally /Flip Vertically

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape and orientation of thestamp.
ll

Roundness &Angle

Roundness: The vertical scaling to apply to the stamp. Reducing this setting
squashes the stamp vertically, allowing you to turn round or square stamps into flatstamps.
Angle: The angle at which to rotate the brush tip, counterclockwise.

NOTE
The squashing is not relative to the angle—if the stamp is rotated, the squashing will
still be done relative to the stamp's original orientation.

Defines the amount of space between each stamp that is applied onto the artwork. The
larger the value, the greater the space between each stamp.

Spacing282

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Property

Description

The percentage of randomness to apply to the size of the stamp. This makes the size of thestamp randomly vary between its Maximum Scale and Minimum Scale settings each time itis applied to your artwork.

Random Size

The greater the value of the Random Size property, the closer to its Minimum Scale the sizeof each stamp can get. For example, if the Random Size setting is set to 50% and the
Minimum Scale is set to 50%, the size of the stamp will randomly vary between 75% and100% of its Maximum Scale.

Random Angle

The maximum value of randomness to apply to the angle of the stamp. This makes theangle of the stamp randomly vary within the range of degrees in this setting, in either
direction, each time it is applied to your artwork. For example, if the stamp's Angle is set to0°, and the Random Angle is set to 180°, each instance of the stamp will be at a random
angle varying between -90° and 90°.

The maximum amount of randomness to apply to the spacing of the stamp. Increasing thissetting makes the distance between each instance of the stamp vary randomly as you draw
a stroke. At 100%, this makes the distance between each stroke vary between 0% and200% of its Spacing property.
Random Spacing

For multi-drawing stamps, this decides the logic with which to cycle through the sequenceof drawings in the stamp as you draw a stroke.
l

Cycle

Forward: Starts by applying the first drawing in the sequence, then the next one,and so on until it reaches the last drawing in the sequence, then cycles back to thefirst one.

283

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description

l

l

l

Reverse: Starts by applying the last drawing in the sequence, then the previous one,and so on until it reaches the first drawing in the sequence, then cycles back to thelast one.

Forward->Reverse: Starts by cycling forward through the sequence until it reaches
the last drawing, then cycles backward to the first drawing, and so on.

Reverse->Forward: Starts by cycling backward through the sequence until itreaches the first drawing, then cycles back to the last drawing, and so on.

lRandom: Applies a random drawing in the sequence each time the stamp is applied.

lHold: Applies a single one of the drawings in the sequence over and over again.

TIP
When this option is set to Hold, you can select which one of the drawings is stamped onby changing the Stamp setting in the Tool Properties view.

For multi-drawing stamps. This makes it so each stroke you draw with the stamp too always
starts with the first drawing in the cycle, which is decided by the Stamp option in the Tool
Properties view.
Reset Cycle for
Each Stroke

When disabled, the Stamp tool keeps track of which drawing it was going to stamp next
when you finish drawing a stroke by storing the number of that drawing in the Stampsetting. When this option is enabled, it simply stops updating the Stamp setting. Hence,
your strokes always start at the drawing selected with that setting. Likewise, you canmanually decide which drawing to start your strokes with by adjusting the Stamp setting.

284

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Stroke Tool Properties
When you select the Stroke tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Draw Stroke as
Straight Lines

Enable the Draw Stroke as Straight Lines option if you want the newstrokes you draw to be a perfect straight line. Disable the option if you
want the stroke to follow the mouse gesture.

Connect Line Ends

Enable the Connect Line Ends option if you want the start or end point of
your new stroke to connect to your existing strokes to make sure no gaps
are left in your drawing.
When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected colour.

Auto Fill

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.

Trim Extra Lines

Align Handles After
Trim

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.

285

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Auto-Flatten Mode

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of theartwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automatically merges
strokes into existing artwork.

Smoothness

You can modify the central line smoothness of your line using this option.
This parameter smooths the initial movement of your line. Increasing thevalue will result in a smoother line with fewer control points. Use the left
and right arrows to increment the value by one full unit. Use the Up Down slider to quickly increment the value.

286Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Text Tool Properties
The Text tool lets you add text fields to your project, in which you can type text, then adjust its formatting
using various fonts and text attributes.
With the Text tool selected, you can select text within text boxes you created and change the formatting of
the selection. You can also select and manipulate text boxes using the Select tool, and change the formattingof the entire text box in the Select tool properties.

How to access the Text tool propertiesl

In the Tools toolbar, select the Text

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Property

Description

Lets you select the font in which to display the text.
Font

Makes the selected text bold.
Bold

ItalicMakes the selected text italic.

287

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the left.

Align Left

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the centre.

Align Center

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the right.

Align Right

Makes the text in the selected text box take all the horizontal space byadjusting the spacing between each word. Text that use a single line
and text in the last line of a paragraph is aligned to the left.
Justify288

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to set the size of the selected text.
Size

Allows you to increase or decrease the spacing between eachcharacter.

Kerning

Auto Kern

Sets the kerning automatically based on the font’s predefined
standard.
Allows you to increase or decrease the indentation of the first line oftext in each paragraph.

IndentIncreases or decreases the space between each line of text.

Line Spacing289

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Transform Tool Properties
When selecting the Transform tool, several options are available in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold theAlt key to temporarily use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a rectangle around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold theAlt key to temporarily use Lasso mode.

Easy Drag

Snapping

When enabled, you can drag the selection by clicking anywhere
inside its bounding box. By default, you must click on the artworkin the selection to be able to drag it.
Allows you to enable or disable snapping for this tool and allother animation and drawing tools that support snapping, as
well as to select which types of snapping are enabled.
If you double-click or long-click on this button, it will open a popup menu in which you can toggle different snapping modes. You

290

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

can also click on this button to toggle it off, which will disable allsnapping modes, and click on it again and toggle it on to reenable the snapping modes which were previously enabled.
This tool supports the following snapping modes:llSnap to Alignment Guides: While moving the selection
or one of its control points, it will snap against nearbyalignment guides.
Snap and Align: While moving the selection, therectangular bounding box of the selection will align withthe rectangular bounding boxes of other elements in yourscene. If you move one of your selection's control points,
it will also align with the bounding boxes of otherelements.

lSnap to Grid: While moving the selection, the mouse
cursor will snap against the intersecting points of the
grid.

TIP
To display the grid, select View > Grid > Show
Grid from the top menu or press Ctrl + '.

Peg Selection ModeIn the Camera view, the Peg Selection Mode limits the selection
to peg layers instead of drawing layers. This mode is usefulwhen you have created a character rig using peg layers for eachdrawing. That way, you do not accidentally select the drawing
layer when you want to animate on the peg.
When disabled, the Transform tool selects the drawing layers.

Bone Selection Mode

When enabled, all bones that exist in a 3D model will be
displayed. The displayed bones will appear in blue.

291

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

NOTE
If the 3D model does not contain any bones, nothing willappear when this mode is enabled.

Allows the selection and manipulation of different types ofinterfaces, such as pegs and curves, together in the same
operation.
Mixed Manipulation Mode

Hide Manipulator Controls

When enabled, certain deformation controls and extra controls
will be able to be selected and manipulated with the Transform
Tool. This will extend the bounding box used by the tool toencompass the selected controls. These controls can then betransformed at the same time with other selected pegs,
drawings and compatible controls.
The Hide Manipulator Controls button lets you hide thebounding box and manipulator controls from the Camera view
when an element is selected.
Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Horizontal

You can also select Animation > Flip > Flip Horizontal from the
top menu or press 4 or 5.
Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip Vertical

You can also select Animation > Flip > Flip Vertical from the top
menu or press 4 or 5.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields to enter specificvalues and precisely reposition the selected shape.

Offset X ad Y
1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection
along the X-axis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection

292

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

along the Y-axis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows tomodify the value in the X or Y value field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields to enter specificvalues to resize the selected shape with precision.

Width and Height

1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize the width ofyour selection.
2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize the height ofyour selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows tomodify the value in the Width or Height fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or unlock the ratio
between the Width and Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specific values andaccurately rotate the selected shape.

Angle

1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field to rotate yourselection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows tomodify the value in the Angle value field.

293

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Zoom Tool Properties
The Zoom tool lets you zoom in and out of the Camera, Drawing, Side and Top views. You can also use it toreset the zoom level.

How to access the Zoom tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Zoom

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Parameter

Description

Zoom In ModeUse the mouse cursor to zoom in to the Camera or Drawing view.

Zoom Out ModeUse the mouse cursor to zoom out of the Camera or Drawing view.

Operations
Icon

Parameter

Perform Zoom In

Description
Zoom in the Camera or Drawing view.
The keyboard shortcut is 2.

Perform Zoom
Out

Zoom out the Camera or Drawing view.

Reset Zoom

Restores the current zoom level to 100%.

Reset View

Restores the original display by resetting any pan, rotation or zoom actions.

The keyboard shortcut is 1.

294

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

295

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Chapter 5: Toolbars
Harmony contains toolbars which, by default, are located at the top of the interface. Some views also have a
toolbar which you can reposition to suit your work style. You can show or hide toolbars, as well as customize itwith the tools you use most often and hide the ones you don't.
Workspace Toolbars

297

Advanced Animation Toolbar

298

Deformation Toolbar

299

Edit Toolbar

302

File Toolbar

303

Game Toolbar

304

Mini Playback Toolbar

305

Pen Settings Toolbar

306

Playback Toolbar

309

Scripting Toolbar

312

Tools Toolbar

313

Workspace Toolbar

319

View Toolbars

320

Camera View Toolbar

321

Drawing View Toolbar

323

Library View Toolbar

324

Port Names Toolbar

325

Script Editor Toolbar

326

Timeline View Toolbar

330

Xsheet View Toolbar

334

296

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Workspace Toolbars
Harmony has a series of toolbars that are added by default at the top of the interface. These toolbars can be
moved on the sides of the interface as well as within specific views.
All top toolbars can be added by selecting Windows > Toolbars in the top menu.
Advanced Animation Toolbar

298

Deformation Toolbar

299

Edit Toolbar

302

File Toolbar

303

Game Toolbar

304

Mini Playback Toolbar

305

Pen Settings Toolbar

306

Playback Toolbar

309

Scripting Toolbar

312

Tools Toolbar

313

Workspace Toolbar

319

297

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Advanced Animation Toolbar
The Advanced Animation toolbar contains tools to position and animate layers. The Scale, Translate andRotate tools can be used to reposition the permanent pivot position of a layer. Unlike the Transform tool, eachtool in the Advanced Animation toolbar performs a single operation, either rotate, scale, translate or scale inrelation to the camera distance.

How to access the Advance Animation toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Advanced Animation.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y
axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element.
You can scale an object up to make it larger or down
to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element
while maintaining its proportions.

Scale

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the
Camera view as you move them towards or awayfrom the camera.

Spline Offset

Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without
offsetting or modifying your animation. By default, thetrajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If your elements
were drawn in a different location than the centre of
the drawing area, it will look like the trajectory is notaligned with your drawing. Also, if you have several
elements attached to one trajectory, you might wantyour trajectory to be at a different location torepresent the group's motion better.

298

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Deformation Toolbar
T-RIG-007-009
The Deformation toolbar contains the various tools and options used to create a deformation rig. This toolbar
is displayed in the default interface.
By default, the Deformation toolbar only contains the essential options. If you right-click on the toolbar andselect Customize, you can add additional buttons.
NOTE
The Customize option is only available if a toolbar is right-clicked in the space above the Camera
view. To move the toolbar to the space above the Camera view, either click and drag the toolbar
directly to the space above, or right-click in the space above and select the toolbar you wish to
add.

Default Buttons
Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Rigging tool is used to create a Bone deformation
chain. You also use it to set up the resting position.

Rigging Tool

To learn more about the Rigging tool's properties, see
Rigging Tool Properties on page 262.

Show Selected
Deformation Chain and
Hide All Others

Displays the deformation controls for the selected
element and all of its children in the Camera view, andhides the deformation controls for any other element
in your scene.

Show Selected
Deformers

Displays the deformation controls for the selected
element and all of its children in the Camera view. If
deformation controls for other elements are currently
visible, they will remain visible as well.

Show Deformation Mesh

Overlay the deformation mesh as a wireframe overthe drawings.

299

Chapter 5: Toolbars

When several points from a curve or envelope
deformation chain are selected, this displays amanipulator bounding box around them. Using thismanipulator, you can move, rotate and scale theselected points together.

Show Manipulator

The Reset Current Keyframe copies the resting
position, the original setup of your skeleton before
undergoing any deformation, to your current frame.
Once you have created a deformation chain, you can
use the Rigging tool to adjust the position andappearance of the rig to fit the element. When the

Reset Current Keyframe

skeleton is in place, you can use the Reset Current
Keyframe button to reset the current frame position to
the resting position.
The Enable Deformations button allows you todisplay your drawings in their original state or with
deformations while creating additional drawings.
Depending on the artwork you need to create, you
might need to refer to the other images either
deformed or in their original position.
Enable Deformations

NOTE
Disabling deformations is only a display
mode. Although drawings will not appear
deformed in the Camera view, even in RenderView mode, they will still be deformed in therendered images.

300

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Optional Buttons
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Remove All Keyframes

The Remove All Keyframes option removes all
keyframes on the selected deformation chain.
The Show All Controls button lets you visualize theresting position in red (Setup mode) and the active
position (Animation) in green at the same time

Show All Controls

301

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains common operations such as Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy and Paste. These commands canalso be found in the Edit top menu.

How to access the Edit toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Edit.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project.
Harmony supports multiple undo, so you can undochanges you made in the order you made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This commandis active only after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste theobject or its properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location
you select in a view.

Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from selected drawing elements inthe Drawing or Camera view or a layer or cells in theTimeline view.

302Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

File Toolbar
The File toolbar contains buttons for common file operations such as New, Save and Open. These commands
can also be found in the File top menu.

How to access the File toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > File.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New (Harmony Stand
Alone)Creates a new scene while closing any scene already open. The New
Scene dialog box opens, asking for directory, name, and resolution
information.

Open

Displays the Open Scene dialog box where you can browse for ascene file. You can open a new scene from the current one and theprevious scene will close.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened scene, drawings, palettes, andpalette lists.
Saves the current file with a different name and at a different location.

Save As

Saves the current state of a scene as another scene. The Save As
window prompts you for a new name and a different location for thisscene before saving it. This will create a complete scene directory forthe new scene.

NOTE
The scene name cannot exceed 23 characters.

Import Images

Imports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

303

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Game Toolbar
The Game toolbar contains tools for setting anchors and props, as well as exporting to sprite sheets and Easel
JS.

How to access the Game toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Toggle Anchor

Adds the Anchor parameter to the selected layer.

Toggle Prop

Adds the Prop parameter to the selected layer.

Export to Sprite Sheets

Opens the Export to Sprite Sheets window where youcan export your animation as sprite sheets .

Export to Easel JS

Opens the Export to Easel JS window where you canexport your animation as Easel JS.

304

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Mini Playback Toolbar
The Mini Playback toolbar allows you to quickly preview a short span of animation starting a few frames
before the current frame and ending a few frames after the current frame, at a customizable frame rate.

How to add the Mini Playback toolbar to your workspace
1. Do one of the following:

Icon

l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Mini Playback.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Mini Playback.

Tool Name

Description

Mini Playback
DialogOpen the Mini Playback dialog. This dialog allows you to set the amount offrames before and after the current frame to playback when using Mini Playback,to set the speed of Mini Playback and to start Mini Playback.

Mini Playback

Begins Mini Playback using the last settings entered in the Mini Playback dialog.
By default, Mini Playback will play 5 frames before and after the current frame,at the scene's frame rate.

305

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Pen Settings Toolbar
The Pen Settings toolbar provides options for enabling and configuring the Pen Stabilizer, which can help you
draw smooth lines with precision and minutia. It also allows you to access the Pen Pressure Feel dialog, whichallows you to configure how the pressure you apply to your tablet pen is processed by Harmony to affect thesize of your drawing strokes.

NOTE
For information on how to use the Pen Settings toolbar, refer to the User Guide.

Icon

Parameter

Description

Allows you to select a method for Harmony to stabilize your drawing strokes.
Stabilization is a process by which Harmony uses the general direction of yourdrawing strokes to create smooth, stable curves and avoid jittering and sharp
corners.
Harmony accomplishes this by his by letting you draw a stroke of a certain
length without generating artwork right away. After your stroke has reachedthat length, Harmony starts generating an drawing stroke that keeps trailingbehind your mouse cursor or tablet pen as you draw. Harmony uses the buffer
between your mouse cursor or pen tablet and the actual drawing stroke togenerate smooth curves and ignore jittering and small mistakes.
The way Harmony does this depends on the stabilization method you choose:Pen Stabilizer
Mode

l

l

l

Stabilizer Off: No stabilization is performed. When you draw a stroke,
artwork for it is generated immediately.
Average: Harmony calculates the average direction of all of your mouseor pen gestures between the end of the actual drawing stroke and thecurrent position of your mouse cursor or pen tip, and extends the strokein this average direction, effectively evening out jitter and rounding
sharp turns.

Pulled String: When you start drawing a stroke, Harmony positions thedrawing tool where your stroke starts. As you move the mouse or tablet
pen, the drawing tool remains in that position, but a "string" appears,

306

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Parameter

Description

linking your drawing tool to your mouse cursor or pen tip.

This string has a certain maximum length. Once that length is reached,
the string pulls the drawing tool in the direction of your mouse cursor ortablet pen.

NOTE
The distance between your mouse cursor or tablet pen and thestroke can be adjusted. For the purpose of demonstration, theseimages were done using the largest supported distance.

This parameter determines how far your drawing strokes trail behind yourmouse cursor or tablet pen as you draw.
In the case of the Average technique Harmony lets you draw an invisible stroke
Pen Stabilizer
Distanceof a certain length before it starts generating the artwork based on the average
direction of that invisible stroke. This parameter determines the invisible
stroke's length.
In the case of the Pulling String, Harmony binds your drawing tool to yourmouse cursor or tablet pen with a virtual string of a given length. Thisparameter sets the length of that string.
Allows you to enable or disable the following options:l

Pen Stabilizer
Settings

Catch Up: When using stabilization, your drawing strokes trail behind
your mouse cursor or tablet pen. With this option enabled, when you
stop moving your pen and just leave it pressed against your tablet, thebrush stroke will progressively catch up to the position of your pen.

NOTES
l

l

l

This option only works if you are drawing with a pen tablet.
This option only works with the Average stabilization
method.

Show String: When using the Pulled String method, the virtual string
binding your drawing tool to your mouse cursor or tablet pen will be

307

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Icon

Parameter

Description

displayed as you draw, allowing you to visualize how the brush stroke
trails behind your mouse cursor or tablet pen.
lEraser: If enabled, strokes with theEraser tool will also bestabilized. By default, the stabilizer works with theandPen Pressure
Feel

Brush,

PencilStroke tools.

Opens the Pen Pressure Feel dialog, which allows you to configure how
Harmony processes the pressure you put on your tablet pen before applying itto the thickness of your drawing strokes—see Pen Pressure Feel Dialog Box.

308

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Playback Toolbar
The Playback toolbar allows you to play your animation as well as to set some playback options such as
looping, audio playback, playback range and playback speed.

Name

ButtonDescription
Plays the scene in the Camera or Drawing
view.

Play

You can also select Play > Play or Stop fromthe top menu.
Renders your scene's frames, then opens therendered frames in Play for playback.
This allows you to preview your scene's
animation in real time, with the effects
rendered and with no risk of slowdown.

Render and PlayYou can click and hold this button to switch its
mode to Record and Play or Test SWF Movie.
Exports your scene as it appears in the Camera
view into a movie file, then opens it in yourworkstation's default video player.
Record and PlayThis allows you to preview your animation
without any risk of slowdown, but it does notpreview the effects in your scene. However, it
is much faster than Render and Play.
Quickly exports your scene as a Flash Movie(.swf), then opens it in your workstation's
default web browser.

Test SWF Movie

309

Chapter 5: Toolbars

If pressed, your scene will repeat indefinitely
when playing. Otherwise, it will stop when theend is reached.

Enable Loop

You can also select Play > Loop from the top
menu.
When pressed, your scene's soundtrack willplay during playback.

Enable SoundYou can also select Play > Enable Sound fromthe top menu.
When pressed, you will hear a sample of yourscene's soundtrack at the current frame whenmoving your scene's playhead in the Timeline
view.

Enable Sound Scrubbing

This allows you to easily situate where theaction is relative to the sound track.
You can also select Play > Enable Sound
Scrubbing.
Allows you to quickly play your scene forward
or backward to preview your animation.
Moving the handle towards the right will playyour scene forward, while moving it towards
the left will play your scene backward.
The closer to the edge you move the handle,
the faster the playback will be, allowing you todose the speed at which your scene is played.
When the handle is at the edge, your scene
will play at its actual framerate.

Jog Frames

Once the head is released, it returns to the
middle and playback stops.

Frame

Lets you manually enter the current frame
number, setting the playhead's position.

Start

Let's you manually enter the number of thefirst frame to play during playback.

310

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

TIP
You can also click on Start (just leftof the input field) to quickly set theStart frame to the current frame.

Let's you manually enter the number of thefirst frame to play during playback.

TIP

Stop

You can also click on Stop (just left of
the input field) to quickly set the Stop
frame to the current frame.

Lets you set the amount of frames that shouldbe played during every second of playback,which is how the playback speed isdetermined.
FPS (Frames per second)

NOTE
This does not change the frames per
second setting in your scene's
resolution settings.

311

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Scripting Toolbar
The scripting toolbar allows you to create buttons that run functions in your scripts. You can add one button
for each function you want to be able to run, and clicking on the button will instantly run the script function
your linked it to.

How to add the Scripting toolbar to your workspace
1. Do one of the following:

Icon

l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Scripting.

Tool Name

Description

ManageScripts

Opens the Scripts Manager dialog box where you can add scripts and functions
to your Scripting toolbar.

Stop Script

Stops the execution of a script launched from the Scripting toolbar.

312Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar contains the main tools you need to work in Harmony. In the default workspace, this toolbar
located on the left edge of the application window.

TIP
Many toolbar buttons have a keyboard shortcut associated to them. You can check which keyboard
shortcut is associated to a button by leaving your mouse cursor over the button for a second. If the
button has a keyboard shortcut, it will be indicated in the tooltip that appears.

By default, the Tools toolbar hides some of its tools inside pop-up menus. For example, to select thetool, you must double-click or long-click the

Select tool button, and select313

CutterCutter in the pop-up menu.

Chapter 5: Toolbars

However, it is possible to make the Tools toolbar display each tool as a separate button by enabling the Flat
Tools Toolbar preference. This makes the selection of tools quicker.

How to make every tool in the Tools toolbar display in buttons rather than pop-up
menus
1. Do one of the following to open the Preferences dialog:llWindows:l

In the top menu, select Edit > Preferences.

l

Press Ctrl + U.

macOS:l

In the top menu, select Harmony Essentials > Preferences.

l

Press ⌘ + U.

2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Options section, check the Flat Tool Toolbar option.
4. Click OK.
5. Close and relaunch Harmony.
NOTE
In Flat Tools Toolbar mode, some tools are hidden from the Tools toolbar by default. To
customize which tools are displayed in the Tools toolbar, and the order in which they aredisplayed, right-click on the Tools toolbar and select Customize.

How to customize which tools are displayed in the Tools toolbar when it is in Flat
mode
1. Right-click on the Tools toolbar and select Customize.
The Toolbar Manager dialog appears.

314Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

2. In the Available Tools list, select each tool that you want to add to the Tools toolbar, then click on
the Add the selected tool to the toolbar

button.

3. In the Toolbar list, select each tool that you want to remove from the Tools toolbar, then click on
the Remove the selected tool from the toolbar

Tool Name

Iconbutton.

Description
Allows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brushstrokes, pencil lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

SelectCutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale,rotate and skew it.

Reposition All
Drawings

Allows you to reposition, scale, rotate and skew all drawings in
the current layer.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil
lines and shapes in your artwork. You can add, remove, tweak andmove vector points, move the Bezier handles of the vector points
as well as deform vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating
the points at the centre of its line rather than its contour.

Smooth Editor

Allows you to optimize contours and lines by removing its extra
points, making them easier to edit.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on
it.

315

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Envelope

Allows you to deform and warp artwork by moving points andtweaking lines in a grid.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients andtextures in a colour zone.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thickand thin line effect, as if created with a paint brush.

Stencil Brush

Allows you to paint over existing artwork within the boundaries ofthat artwork or the boundaries set by selecting the artwork ofdifferent layers.

Overlay Brush ModeIn Overlay Brush Mode, the existing artwork is used as a mask togenerate new brush strokes which are added on top, leaving theexisting artwork untouched.

Repaint Brush Mode

In Repaint Brush Mode, the existing artwork is replaced andrepainted, ignoring empty zones.
A pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are

Pencilmade of central vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit
than brush strokes.

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Paint Unpainted

Allows you to quickly fill empty zones in your artwork with acolour or texture, leaving filled zones unchanged.

Unpaint

Allows you to empty filled colour zones of their colour andtexture.

StrokeAllows you to create invisible lines that can serve as colour zones
that can be filled, or close the gaps in existing colour zones.

316

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Close Gap

Line

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with
the Paint tool. By drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape,
this tool will create a small invisible stroke connecting the two
closest points around the gap.

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curvedlines by clicking to create each point in the sequence of line
segments.

Colour Eyedropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in yourartwork.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Camera and Drawing views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Camera and Drawing views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Camera and Drawing views just like with a realanimation disc.

Shift and Trace

Allows you to temporarily move drawings so you can trace overthem in other drawings using Onion Skin.

When this option is selected, every time you use theTransform or
Animate Current Frame

Animate Onion Skin
Range

Advanced Animation tools tomanipulate an element in your scene, the position of the element
will be stored in a keyframe at the current frame. This allows you
to animate elements in your scene without creating keyframes
manually.

When this option is selected, if you use theTransform or
Advanced Animation tools to make transformations

317

Chapter 5: Toolbars

to an element in your scene, the transformations will be stored as
keyframes at the beginning and at the end of the current Onion
Skin range, as well as on every existing keyframe in-between.
This can be useful if you want to reposition an element that you
have already animated, but only during a specific range of frames,
which you can define by enabling Onion Skin and setting theOnion Skin range to cover that range of frames.

When this option is selected, if you use theTransform or
Advanced Animation tools to make transformation
Animate Off

to an element in your scene, the transformations will affect theelement throughout the whole scene. This can be useful if you
want to reposition an element after you have already animated it.

Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale andskew them.

Onion Skin

Displays the previous and next frames of an animation. Usefulwhen animating cut-out characters.

Advanced Onion Skin

Enables Advanced Onion Skin, a more flexible kind of Onion Skinthat can be easily configured using the Onion Skin view.

318Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Workspace Toolbar
The Workspace toolbar lets you load other workspaces. The first time you start Harmony, the default
workspace is loaded. Other workspaces are available such as the Hand-Drawn Animation and Compositing
workspaces; these display different views and toolbars. You can access these workspaces and any you create,from the Windows menu and the Workspace toolbar.

How to access the Workspace toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Workspace.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Workspace List

Allows you to select an existing workspace.
Opens the Workspace Manager where you canWorkspace Manager

organize, display, and remove workspace from yourlist.
When the Automatically Save Workspace preferenceis disabled, the Save Workspace button becomes
available. This allows you to manually save your newworkspace configuration.

Save Workspace319

Chapter 5: Toolbars

View Toolbars
Harmony has a series of view specific toolbars that are only available in a given view. These toolbars can be
moved only within their view.
All view toolbars can be added, as long as the view is visible, through the top menu Windows > Toolbars >desired toolbar.
Camera View Toolbar

321

Drawing View Toolbar

323

Library View Toolbar

324

Port Names Toolbar

325

Script Editor Toolbar

326

Timeline View Toolbar

330

Xsheet View Toolbar

334

320

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Camera View Toolbar

Icon

ButtonDescription

Show Grid

Displays a grid to align or use for camera
moves.

Reset All Transformations

Resets all parameters to their default values.
For example, position x = 0, scale = 1, rotation= 0.

Create Colour Art from LineArt

Creates invisible strokes allowing you to paintyour drawings on separate layers.

Flatten

The Flatten operation is used to merge
drawing objects and brush strokes into asingle layer. See Flattening Drawings.
Locks the layer so that you cannot select it in

Lock

Camera view.

Unlock All

Unlocks all layers of the scene so that you canselect any one of them.

Show Controls

Display 3D/separate paths for peg or drawing
layers. Can also show manipulators fordifferent effects (e.g. quadmap).

Hide All Controls

Hides all manipulators for peg or drawing
paths and effects.

Top Light

Allows you to change how much you see inthe previous/next drawings in onion skin andother layers in the Light table mode.

Mirror View

Temporarily flips a drawing space horizontally,
whether in the Camera or Drawing view. See
Mirror View.

321

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Onion Skin Add One
Previous Drawing

Displays one extra previous drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin.

Onion Skin Reduce One
Previous Drawing

Displays one less previous drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin.

Onion Skin Reduce One Next
Drawing

Displays one less following drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin.

Onion Skin Add One Next
Drawing

Displays one extra following drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin

Flip Horizontal-Animation

Horizontally flip selected layers and create akeyframe with opposite value in Scale X
parameter.

Flip Vertical-Animation

Vertically flip selected layers and create akeyframe with opposite value in Scale Y
parameter.
The Drawing Pivot tool lets you set the pivots

Drawing Pivot

on your character.

322

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Drawing View Toolbar

Icon

ButtonDescription

Show Grid

Displays a grid to align or use for camera
moves.

Show Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see theprevious and subsequent active layers in
washed-out colours. It is useful for seeing theother layers when designing, animating or
cleaning up your animation. For more
information, see Using the Light Table.

Create Colour Art from LineArt

Creates invisible strokes allowing you to paintyour drawings on separate layers.

Group

Groups and ungroups selected drawing
objects and strokes

Top Light

Allows you to change how much you see inthe previous/next drawings in onion skin andother layers in the Light table mode.

Mirror View

Temporarily flips a drawing space horizontally,
whether in the Camera or Drawing view. See
Mirror View.

Onion Skin Add One
Previous Drawing

Displays one extra previous drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin.

Onion Skin Reduce One
Previous Drawing

Displays one less previous drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin.

Onion Skin Reduce One Next
Drawing

Displays one less following drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin.

Onion Skin Add One Next
Drawing

Displays one extra following drawing to thecurrent drawing in Onion Skin

323

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Library View Toolbar

Icon

ButtonDescription

Open LibraryLets you open a library on your computer.

Close Library

Unlinks a library folder from your library list.

New Folder

Creates a new folder in the Library view.
Before you can create a new folder, you musthave the right to modify the folder in which
you are creating the new folder.

RefreshUpdates the view and its contents.

View List

Displays the contents of the selected folder as
a list.

View Details

Displays the details of the selected file.

View Thumbnails

Displays the contents of the selected folder asa thumbnails.

324Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Port Names Toolbar
The Port Names Toolbar allows you to view a list of Port Names that can be inserted or selected that willaffect the Port Filter of the current display.

How to access the Port Names toolbar
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Port Names.

lRight-click on the top area of the Camera view and select Port Names.

NOTE
The Port Names Toolbar will remember up to ten Port Names at a time.

325

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Script Editor Toolbar
The Script Editor toolbar gives you quick access to some commonly used commands for editing and testing
scripts in the Script Editor view—see Script Editor View on page 374.

How to access the Script Editor toolbar
1. Add the Script Editor view to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on the

Add View button and select Script

Editor.
l

In the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

2. Click on the Script Editor view to set the focus on it.
3. In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Script Editor.

Icon

ButtonDescription

Creates a new script. When you click on this button, you are first prompted totype in a name for the script. Then, you will be prompted to select which
location to save the script in:ll

New Scriptl

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory.
You will be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you
are logged in as the same user.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will
be able to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only
available if this environment variable is set.

NOTE
For more information on script locations, see Script list on page 374.

326

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

ButtonDescription

Allows you to import a script from your machine into Harmony. When you clickon this button, you are prompted to browse for and select a script on your filesystem. Then, you are prompted to select which location to import the script in:ll

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory.
You will be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you
are logged in as the same user.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will
be able to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.

Import ScriptlSystem Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only
available if this environment variable is set.

NOTES
l

l

When you import a script, any user interface (.ui) or icon (.png) filethat is in the same directory and has the same filename as the script
will also be imported.
For more information on script locations, see Script Editor View on
page 374.

Deletes the selected script.

NOTES
l

Delete Scriptl

You cannot delete a script if it is in the Application Resources location,
as those are scripts that are installed with Harmony.
If you delete a script that was originally in Application Resources but
which you copied to another location so you could make changes to it,
the original version of the script in the Application Resources folder
will be restored to the list.

Refresh Script
File List

Refresh the list of scripts in the Script Editor. If there are new scripts in your user
preferences or your scene's scripts sub-folder, click on this button to be able toopen them in the Script Editor.

Set External
EditorAllows you to type in the path and name for your preferred text editing
software.

327

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Icon

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

Open with
External Editor

On macOS, only typing the name of your preferred text editing
software is enough if that application supports the AppleScript OpenDocument protocol.
On Windows, unless your text editor is in your system's PATH
environment variable, you will have to type in the full path to theeditor.

Opens the selected script in the chosen external text editing software.

Prompts you to select which script and which function to use with the
and

Run

Debug buttons.

NOTES
Set Targetll

You can set the entire script as the target by selecting the <Nothing>
function from the functions list.
You cannot link an entire script to a toolbar button. Only functions
within scripts can be added as toolbar buttons. Therefore, running or
debugging an entire script rather than one of its functions should bedone for testing purposes only.

Runs the target script and function.

NOTES
l

Run
l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted
to set one when you click on this button.
You can set or change the target script and function by clicking on the
Set Target button.

l

Debug

If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply run what
you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is
set.

Open the target script and function in the Qt Script Debugger, in which you cantest and debug the function.

328

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted
to set one when click on this button.
You can set or change the target script and function by clicking on the
Set Target button.

l

Stop Execution

If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply debug
what you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether anothertarget is set.

If a script is currently running, this interrupts its execution.

329

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Timeline View Toolbar
The 3D Graph toolbar works in conjunction with the elements in the 3D Graph view.

How to access the Timeline view toolbar
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Timeline View.

lRight-click on the space at the top of the Timeline view and, in the context menu, selectTimeline View.

Icon

Name

Description

Allows you to quickly apply an ease to the selected animation keyframes in
the camera view.
Set Ease TypeTo set the ease of an animation, simply select the first keyframe in the
animation, then select the ease type in this drop-down. The ease-in will beapplied to the selected keyframe, and the ease-out will be applied to thenext keyframe in the timeline.
The following presets are available:

330Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Name

Description

Icon

PresetEase-In(Selected
Keyframe)

Ease-Out (Nextkeyframe)Linear0%0%Slow ease-in

25%

0%

Medium easein

50%

0%

Fast ease-in

75%

0Fast ease-in /ease-out

75%

75%

Medium easein / ease-out

50%

50%

Slow ease-in /ease-out

25%

25%

Slow ease-out

0%

25%

Medium easeout

0%

50%

Fast ease-out

0%

75%

Quick Ease

Sets the ease before and after the selected keyframe to 33%.

Quick Ease In

Sets the ease before the selected keyframe to 33%.

Quick Ease Out

Sets the ease after the selected keyframe to 33%.

331

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Icon

Name

Description

Set Ease on
Selected
Keyframes

Opens the Set Ease on Keyframes dialog. In this dialog, you can set the easein (before) and the ease-out (after) on the selected keyframes to a custom
percentage.

Set Ease forMultiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog. This dialog allows you toadjust the Bezier handles on all the selected animation keyframes in theTimeline.

Create Empty
Drawing

Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets anotherdrawing, key exposure or a blank cell.

Fill Empty Cells

Fills the empty frames in the selection with the exposure just before. For
example, if you select a range of frame that starts with an exposed drawing
and then ends with empty cells, all of the empty cells in the selection will befilled with the exposed drawing just before the empty cells.
Creates a duplicate of the selected drawing in the layer. The duplicate
drawing will be exposed at the selected frame instead of the original
drawing. Hence, this command allows you to instantly start working on a
duplicate of the current drawing and retain the original.

Duplicate Drawing

NOTE
When duplicating a drawing, the exposure at the selected cell isreplaced with the new drawing, up until the next key exposure.

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe on the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Delete Keyframes

Deletes the selected keyframes.

Set Motion
Keyframe

Converts the selected keyframes to motion keyframes. With motion
keyframes, Harmony generates the interpolation between the motion
keyframe and the next keyframe. This means that a value for each frame
between the keyframes is calculated by Harmony to progress from the valueof the previous keyframe to the value of the next keyframe.

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Converts the selected keyframes to stop-motion keyframes. Between astop-motion keyframe and the next keyframe, Harmonydoes not generate332

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Name

Description

any animation and the element remains static until the next keyframe.
Go to Previous
Keyframe

Goes to the previous keyframe.

Go to Next
Keyframe

Goes to the next keyframe.

Add Key Exposure

Adds a key exposure to the selected cell.

Delete Key
Exposure

Removes key exposures from the selected cells.

Centre On
Selection

Scrolls the layers list to the currently selected layer. This is useful if you
want to select a layer in the Camera view, then manipulate its timing
Timeline view.
Opens the Paste Special dialog. This dialog allows you to paste copied

Paste Special

frames or layers and select exactly what type of information is pasted andhow it is pasted into the target range.

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected layers.

333

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Xsheet View Toolbar
The Xsheet toolbar contains the common timing operations such as Add Column, Delete Column, Clone
Column, and so on. These options can also be found in the top menu.

334

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

335

Chapter 6: Views

Chapter 6: Views
The Harmony interface is composed of different views, each one designed for a specific purpose. You can
modify the location of the views by adding a new view as a tab or as a window. You can also swap the locationof a view.
When a view is active, a red rectangle appears around the view. Keyboard shortcuts and top menu options areassociated with the active view. If a menu option is greyed out, it means it does not apply to the layer, drawing
or other type of selection or the option does not apply to the active view.
Camera View

337

Colour View

346

Drawing View

351

Drawing Substitutions View

353

Function View

355

Guides View

358

Integrated Help View

362

Layer Properties View

363

Library View

365

Master Controller View

368

Message Log View

370

Metadata Editor View

371

Python Script Console View

373

Script Editor View

374

Side View

378

Timeline View

380

Tool Properties View

389

Top View

390

Xsheet View

392

336

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Camera View
The Camera view is the centre of operations in Harmony. In this view, you can draw, paint, animate, set up yourscene, manipulate objects, open symbols and preview your animation.
The Camera view also has a top and bottom toolbar that you can use to navigate in the view, change thedisplay mode or go up your symbol hierarchy.

How to access the Camera view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Camera.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

337

button and select Camera.

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

SectionDescription

Editing Stack

The Editing Stack menu displays the names of the symbols and theirhierarchy when you are editing a symbol. You can click on the
different names to go back up to the different parent symbols or the
top/current project.

Camera View Toolbar

The Camera View toolbar contains all the tools and options you canuse in the Camera view to draw, animate or set up the scene. The
toolbar can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking on it andselecting or deselecting the Camera View toolbar.
When you have a drawing layer or drawing selected, the Light Table
button button allows you to fade the colours of the other layers so
you can see the current artwork better as you edit with a drawing
tool. Note that the light table does not work when using a layer
editing tool, such as the Transform tool.

Light Table

When this button is enabled, the drawing that you are currently
editing with a drawing tool is temporarily displayed in front of all theother elements. The actual scene is not modified.

Current Drawing on Top

Camera Mask

The Camera Mask button shows or hides Displays a black mask
around the scene’s frame to avoid seeing the unnecessary artwork.
This option is handy when you're animating and setting up the scene.
It allows you to see your scene’s composition better.

338

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

You can also access this from the top menu by selecting View >Show > Camera Mask.

The proportion grid is displayed in the camera view to help withproportions and balancing the composition of an image. The gridfollows the camera frame, similar to camera mask and safe area.

Proportion Grid

The number of divisions in the proportion grid can be defined by theuser in the Preferences > Camera > Proportion Grid > Horizontal
Divisions > Vertical Divisions.
The default is 3 division on each axis to create a rule of third grid.

TIP
You can access the Proportion Gridbutton in the Camera

View toolbar.

The Safe Area button shows or hides Displays the TV safety zone
and the centre of the camera frame. The safe area adapts to thescene resolution, as well as the safety zone and frame’s centre.
You can also access this feature from the top menu by selecting
View > Show > Safe Area.

Safe Area

339

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

SectionDescription

When enabled, alignment guides will be visible in the Camera andDrawing views.
Show Alignment Guides

This is enabled by default. Disabling this option will hide and disablealignment guides, meaning that animation and drawing tools will not
snap to them, even if theSnap to Alignment Guides option isenabled in the Tool Properties view.
Drawings that are locked in the Timeline view (cannot be selected in
the Camera view) are displayed as wireframes.

Outline Locked Drawings

Reset View

The Reset View button resets any panning, zooming or rotation donein the Camera view and returns the display to the initial settings. You
can also press Shift + M.
Saves the preview image of the Camera view in memory as asnapshot.

Take Snapshot

Harmony stores five snapshots and have a drop down list with fiveavailable slots. So if any snapshot was in memory when taking asnapshot, it will be overwritten by the new snapshot.

NOTES
l

Show Snapshot

Snapshots are not saved to the scene and are discarded
when the scene is closed.

Displays the snapshot currently in memory. To display the snapshot,
you must click and hold the button. Releasing it will restore theCamera view preview.

340Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

NOTE
The snapshot is displayed as it was taken, regardless of thepreview mode of the Camera view. For example, if you took ascreenshot in Render View mode, and display it while in
OpenGL View mode, the snapshot will display as it was taken
in Render View mode.

The Zoom menu lets you enlarge or reduce the Camera or Drawing
view display.
To make the camera frame size always match the size of your view,
select the Fit to View option. Click the drop-down arrow and select azoom level or press 1 and 2.

Zoom Menu

The OpenGL View Mode button switches the Camera view to fast
display, letting you see your animation play in real time. The OpenGL
display requires less memory. The final look of your effects is notshown in the OpenGL View Mode. You must switch to the RenderView Mode to see your effects.

OpenGL View Mode

341

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

SectionDescription

The Render View Mode button switches the Camera view to a fully
rendered display showing the final image of the current frame. If a
modification is done to your current frame or if you move to adifferent frame, click the Update Preview button to update thedisplay if your preview does not update automatically.The RenderView Mode display lets you see the final look of your frames
including effects and antialiasing. You cannot play back your scene in
Render View Mode. To see your scene fully rendered and to play it
back, you must press the Render and Play button in the Playback
toolbar.
Render View Mode

The Matte View Mode button switches the Camera view to a mattedisplay showing the alpha channel of the elements in your scene.
The transparency level ranges from 0 to 100 percent. Zero percent iscompletely transparent and represented by black and 100 percent iscompletely opaque and represented by white. Everything in between
these extremes has a transparency level somewhere between 1 and99 percent and is represented in various shades of grey.
l

To access the Matte View mode, click on the Render View
button and select Matte View from the drop-down menu.

Matte View Mode

342

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

The Depth View mode displays images in a relative white to black
gradient scale. The object(s) closest to the camera are displayed inwhite and the object(s) furthest from the camera are displayed inblack. If the position of the last object changes along the z-axis, that
object will still remain black, so long as it retains its position as theobject the farthest back. It does not matter where that object is in 3D
space, it just matters what its position is relative to the other object inthe same space. The objects closest and farthest from the camera set
the range of the white to black scale. All the other objects fall
somewhere in between.
Depth View Model

To access the Depth View mode, click on the Render View
button and select Depth View from the drop-down menu.

The colour space in which to display the preview image when in
Render Preview mode.
You can set this to any colour space supported by Harmony. It is
recommended to set this to the colour space intended for rendering
your frames, unless that colour space is not supported by yourmonitor. In the latter case, it’s recommended to set this to the closest
colour space available that your monitor can display.
The following colour spaces are available:
Preview Colour Space

l

l

l

sRGB: A colour space typically used for standard computer
monitors. It has the same primaries and white point as Rec.
709, but has a different gamma transfer curve.
Display P3: A colour space commonly used for digitalprojection. It has the same primaries as DCI-P3, the same
white point as sRGB and the same gamma transfer curve assRGB.
P3-D65 PQ: A high-dynamic-range (HDR) colour space thatuses P3-D65 primaries and perceptual quantization (PQ) as

343

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

SectionDescription

the transfer function. This colour space supports higher
brightness. You have the option to remap 1000, 2000, or
4000 nits colours to the P3 limited dynamic range.
Tone mapping reduces the tone values of high-dynamicrange (HDR) images to make it more suitable for digital
displays. For no tone mapping, select Un-tone-mapped.
lRec. 709: The colour space used for HDTV. It has the same
primaries and white point as sRGB, but has a different
gamma transfer curve.

l

l

l

Rec. 709 2.4: The same colour space as Rec. 709 or sRGB,
except with a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 (per ITU-R
BT.1886). This colour space exists because some editing
systems use a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 instead of thestandard gamma curve for Rec. 709.
Rec. 2020: A colour space used for Ultra High Definition TV(UHDTV). It has a complex gamma transfer curve andprimaries that cover more of the human-perceivable colour
space than other colour spaces, especially in the area of
human-perceivable greens.
Rec. 2020 2.4: The same colour space as Rec. 2020, except
with a simple gamma transfer curve of 2.4 (per ITU-R
BT.1886). This colour space exists because some editing
systems use a gamma transfer curve of 2.4 instead of thestandard gamma curve for Rec. 2020.

l

Rec.2100 PQ:An HDR colour space that uses Rec.2020
primaries and perceptual quantization (PQ) as the transfer
function. An additional transform could be selected for 1000,
2000, or 4000 nits. For no tone mapping, select Un-tonemapped.

NOTE
You can only select the display colour space in
View mode. In

Render

OpenGL View mode, the preview image is

generated in the colour space selected in the Display Colour
Space drop-down in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

344

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

TIP
You can have multiple Camera views in your workspace, each
set to their own colour space. Hence, you can preview yourscene on multiple monitors with different colour spaces by
having a Camera view on each monitor.

Drawing NameThe Drawing Name field displays the name of the selected drawing,as well as the layer containing it. If the cell does not contain any
drawing, an Empty Cell text is shown in the field.

Preview Resolution

The Preview Resolution button sets the resolution of the renderpreview. A lower preview resolution will result in a faster loading
time when previewing an effect.

Tool Name

The Tool Name field displays the name of the selected tool. If you
temporarily override a drawing tool using a keyboard shortcut, thetool’s name will be highlighted in red. You can temporarily override atool by holding its keyboard shortcut without the Alt key. For
example, the Select tool shortcut is Alt + S. If you hold down the S
key, you will switch to the Select tool. When you release the key, youwill return to the tool you were using.

Frame Number

The Frame Number field displays the number of the current frame.

Selected Colour

The colour swatch displays the currently selected colour in the
Colour view.

345

Chapter 6: Views

Colour View
The Colour view is where you create colours and palettes and import existing palettes into your project. The
Colour view is also necessary for drawing, painting and creating colour styling.

How to access the Colour view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Colour.

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Colour.

Palette List Panel
Icon

OptionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the commands and options that you canuse in the Colour view to manage colours and palettes.

Collapse/Expand Palette
List

Allows you to show or hide your palette list and its options. By
default, the palette list is displayed, but you may want to hide it if you

346Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

are working with a single palette and want to allow more verticalspace for the colour swatch list.

Add Palette

Allows you to create a new palette.

Deletes the currently selected palette. If the colour swatch is used inyour project, zones painted with colour swatches which have been
deleted will turn red, easily identifying them so you can repaint themwith another colour swatch.

Remove Palette

Import Palette

Allows you to import a palette from your machine into your scene's
palette list. The palette will be copied to your scene's folder.
Moves palettes further up or down the palette list.

Order Palette List

If a palette has been cloned, the highest palette among the original
palette and its clone(s) will be used by Harmony.
In Harmony Server, this icon appears when you have the modifying
rights on your scene's palette list. While several users can work on ascene at the same time, only one user may have the right to modify apalette list at any given time.

Edit Palette List Mode
Indicator

NOTE
In Harmony Stand Alone, you can always modify your scene's
palette list. On Harmony Server, you must unlock your palette
list before making modifications to it.

Palette List
Icon

Description

347

Chapter 6: Views

In Harmony Server, this indicates that you have the rights to modify the palette.

Indicates that the palette is stored at the same level as its palette list. For example, a palette that isstored in the scene's palette library and which is listed in the scene's palette list, or a palette that isstored in an element's palette library and which is listed in that same element's palette list.
Indicates that the palette file is stored in an external location, such as a different scene, an element in
a different scene, a job other than the scene's job, or an environment other than the scene's
environment. This means the palette is liable to be missing if it is moved from its original location, or if
the scene is exported from the database into an offline scene or to a different database.
This indicates that the palette is stored at a higher level than its palette list, making it a shared
palette. For example, a palette in your scene's palette list that is stored in the palette library of thescene's job or environment, or a palette in an element's palette list that is stored in the palette libraryof the scene.
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation. For example, a palette file that is stored in one of thescene's element folders, but which is added to your scene's palette list. The whole scene can use thepalette, but since it's stored inside an element, deleting that element will make your whole scene lose
access to that palette.

Colour Swatch List Panel
Icon

OptionDescription

Add Colour

Adds a new colour swatch to the bottom of your colour list.

Remove Colour

The Remove Colour button lets you delete the currently selectedcolour swatches. If the colour swatch is used in your project, andconfirmation dialog will appear prompting you to confirm that you
want to delete the colour. Zones painted with colour swatches
which have been deleted will turn red, easily identifying them so
you can repaint them with another colour swatch.

348

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Allows you to import a bitmap image as a texture, which can be
painted with just like a colour. When used with the Brush or Paint
tools, bitmap textures are tiled inside the shape they fill. The
scaling and position of the texture inside their shape can be
tweaked with the Edit Gradient/Texture tool. When used with thePencil tool or one of the Shape tools, a bitmap texture will follow
the pencil line's direction.

Add Texture

Each colour swatch available in the Colour view can have its own
name, making it easy to identify which colour is used to paint whatpart of your character or background.

Colour Swatch NameNOTE
Two colours can have the same name. Harmony identifies
colours by an identification number.

349

Chapter 6: Views

Also referred to as colour pots, the colour swatch is the actual
colour information for a colour in your palette. It is represented bya rectangle displaying the colour in the list.
Colour Swatch

350

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Drawing View
In Harmony, you can draw in both the Drawing or Camera views. Although the two views are similar, there aresome differences when it comes to drawing.
Only the selected drawing is displayed by default in the Drawing view. You can use features, such as the lighttable to display the current drawing of all the enabled layers of your scene in washed-out colours, or theOnion Skin to display the previous and next drawings of the currently selected drawing layer.

How to access the Drawing view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Drawing .

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Drawing.

SectionDescription

Drawing Area

This is the main space in the Drawing view. It is where
you draw and where the drawings are displayed.

351

Chapter 6: Views

The Zoom menu lets you enlarge or reduce theCamera or Drawing view display.
To make the camera frame size always match the sizeof your view, select the Fit to View option. Click thedrop-down arrow and select a zoom level or press 1
and 2.

Zoom Menu

Drawing NameThe Drawing Name field displays the name of theselected drawing, as well as the layer containing it. If
the cell does not contain any drawing, an Empty
Cell text is shown in the field.

Tool Name

The Tool Name field displays the name of the selected
tool. If you temporarily override a drawing tool using akeyboard shortcut, the tool’s name will be highlighted
in red. You can temporarily override a tool by holding
its keyboard shortcut without the Alt key. For
example, the Select tool shortcut is Alt + S. If you holddown the S key, you will switch to the Select tool.
When you release the key, you will return to the tool
you were using.

Frame NumberThis field displays the current frame of the animation
you are working on.

Cursor Coordinates

This indicates the position of the your pointer in thedrawing area.

Colour Picker

The Colour Picker allows you to select a colour for
drawing.

352

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Drawing Substitutions View
T-H16NEW-002-001
The Drawing Substitutions view allows you to view all the drawings in the selected layer in a list of
thumbnails, as well as to quickly select which drawing should be exposed at the current frame.

How to access the Drawing Substitutions view
1. Do one of the followinglFrom the top menu, select Windows > Drawing Substitutions.

l

In the top-right corner of any view, click on the

Add View button and select Drawing

Substitutions.

SectionDescription

Opens a menu with the Create Key Exposure option. This option can be enabled or disabled.
It determines what happens when you set the drawing in the current frame to the samedrawing as the drawing in the previous frame.
View MenullWhen enabled, the exposure of the drawing at the current frame will be separated
from the drawing in the previous frame with a key exposure.
When disabled, the exposure of the current frame will be merged with the exposure of
the previous frame.

353

Chapter 6: Views

SectionDescription

Allows you to select the drawing to be exposed at the current frame. This will also replace thedrawing for all subsequent frames during which the current drawing is exposed.

Thumbnails

Current layer
name

The name of the currently selected layer. The drawings in the thumbnails list are the drawings
currently stored in this layer.

Zoom slider

Allows you to change the size of the thumbnails.

354

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Function View
The Function view lets you edit function curves and parameters. It contains a visual graph for adding,removing, and editing keyframes, as well as adjusting the velocity. The Function view allows you to display
multiple functions in the background as a reference.

How to access the Function view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Function.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Function.

How to display functions in the Function view
1. Open the Function view.
The Function view is blank until you select the layer containing the functions you want to display.

355

Chapter 6: Views

2. To display a function in the Function view, click on the layer containing the functions to adjust in theTimeline view.
3. To select the functions you want to edit, select them in the Function list.

Parameter

Description

Function List
When selecting a layer in the Timeline view, all the corresponding functions are
displayed (if any). Select the functions you want to see and edit, and hide the ones
you don't.

Display Toolbar

Allows you to modify how the editing area is displayed. You can hide the grid,disable the synchronization with the current frame, reset the zoom level andnormalize the function display by stacking them one over the other to comparethem regardless of their value range.

Current Frame

Displays the current scene frame.

Selected Keyframe Value

Displays the value of the selected keyframe.

Display Advanced Parameter
Values

Displays the Projection, Bias, Tension and Continuity parameters to adjust the
curve around the selected keyframe.

Keyframe, Velocity andInterpolation Options

This toolbar lets you add and delete keyframes, adjust the velocity curve, adjust
the segments to motion or stop-motion keyframes and set the velocity to create
steps instead of a constant progression.

Function Types

This toolbar lets you click on the different function types to enable or disable all
the listed functions of that type.

Value Scale

Displays the value range for the displayed editing area. It can be referenced toknow the value of a keyframe.

356

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Selected Keyframe

The selected keyframe is displayed in red. When selected, the keyframe values
are displayed in the corresponding fields.

Bezier Handles

The Bezier handles let you adjust the ease in and ease out of each keyframe. The
more the handle is pulled out horizontally, the slower the animation will be. The
more the handle is pulled out vertically, the faster the animation will be.

Function Curve

The thin line going from keyframe to keyframe is the actual curve. The section of acurve located between two keyframes is called a segment.

Frame Scale

The Frame Scale displays the frame range for the displayed editing area. It can bereferenced to know the current frame of a keyframe.

357

Chapter 6: Views

Guides View
The Guides view allows you to add drawing guides to the current scene, to select which guide to use, tomanage existing guides, to export and import guides and to enable or disable drawing guides as well as theirvarious options.

NOTE
For more information on each type of guide and how to use them, refer to the User Guide.

Icon

Name

Description

Enable Guide

Enables or disables drawing guides. When guides are disabled, they are
not visible and you cannot edit them or use them with drawing tools.

Options

358

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Name

Description

When enabled, when drawing with theandAlign with Guide

Brush,

Pencil,StrokeLine tools tool, the cursor is automatically locked against the axisof the currently selected guide that most closely matches the angle of yourstroke, as if you were drawing against a rule.
When disabled, the drawing tools are not constrained by the axes of theguide, allowing you to draw freely. The guide's axes act as a visual aids
only.

Lock Guide

When enabled, you cannot do modifications on the currently selected
guide. This prevents making unwanted modifications to the guide whendrawing.

Enable Guide with
EraserAllows you to use the Eraser tool with drawing guides.

Full Cursor Display

When enabled, the guide's axes that go through the mouse cursor in thedrawing space go throughout the entire drawing space and display evenwhen you're drawing.
When disabled, the guide's axes that go through the mouse cursor only
display over a short distance from the mouse cursor. Also, the guide's axes
disappear when drawing a stroke.

Show Reference
Lines

When enabled, semi-transparent reference lines for each of the currently
selected guide's axes appear all over your drawing space.
Adjusts the amount of reference lines to display in your drawing space.

Number of Lines

Guides List
Allows you to add a guide to the scene's guides list. You can add a guideof one of the following types:

New Guide

l

Ruler

l

Square Gridl

Isometric Perspectivel

1-Point Perspective359

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

Name

Descriptionl2-Point Perspectivel3-Point Perspective (Bird’s-Eye View)l3-Point Perspective (Worm’s-Eye View)l3-Point Perspective (Horizontal Pan)l3-Point Perspective (Vertical Pan)l4-Point Continuous Perspectivel

4-Point Perspective (Vertical Pan)l5-Point Perspective (Fisheye)

NOTE
For more information on each type of guide and how to use them,refer to the User Guide.

Allows you to add a guide to the symmetry guides list. You can add a
guide of one of the following types:
New SymmetrylVerticallHorizontall

Dual Axis

Guide

Delete Guide

Deletes the selected drawing guides from the scene's guides list.

Guides View Menu

Opens a menu with the following commands:

RenameGuide

Renames the selected drawing guide.

Cut

Cuts the selected drawing guides from the list and adds them to the
clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected drawing guides to the clipboard.

Paste

Pastes drawing guides from the clipboard to the current scene's guides
list. Pasted guides are inserted under the selected guide.

360Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

Name

Description

ImportGuidesImports drawing guides that were previously exported to a file and inserts
them at the bottom of the scene's guides list. Duplicate guides are filteredout to avoid cluttering the list.

ExportSelected
GuidesExports the selected drawing guides into a file.

Displays the scene's list of guides and allows you to select which guide todisplay, edit and use.

Drawing Guides List

361

Chapter 6: Views

Integrated Help View
Use the Integrated Help when you are unsure about what a certain menu item is or the function of a specificpreference in the Preferences panel.
If you keep the Integrated Help window open for the entire duration of your work session, then you can use theforward and backward arrows to scroll through a history of the help information that you called up during yoursession.

How to access the Integrated Help view
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Integrated Help.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

362

button and select Integrated Help.

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Layer Properties View
The Layer Properties editor or view lets you adjust the properties of a layer in the Timeline view The Layer
Properties can be viewed as a floating window or as a view (docked).
Each layer has its own set of properties that can be modified, including effect and peg layers. Display the Layer
Properties editor or view if you want to modify some of the layer’s properties, such as the name or theantialiasing quality.
NOTE
To know more about the parameters displayed in the Layer Properties view, see Layers on page160.

How to access the Layer Properties view
Do one of the following:363

Chapter 6: Views

lFrom the top menu, select Windows > Layer Properties.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Layer Properties.

How to access the Layer Properties editorlDouble-click on a layer in the Timeline viewlRight-click on a layer in the Timeline view and select Layer Properties.

l

Select a layer in the Timeline view and press Shift + E.

364

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Library View
The Library view is used to store elements such as animation, drawings, backgrounds and character models so
as to reuse in different scenes and projects. You can also use the Library view to create and store symbols, aswell as to store and import images and sound files.
To reuse elements from a scene in other scenes, you must create a template so that you can import it into
different scenes. Templates can contain anything from a single drawing to a whole scene structure. You cancreate a template by creating it in a scene, then copying the elements you want in your template into a library.
The resulting template is structured like a mini-scene that contains only the elements you copied into it. A
template does not have any dependencies on the scene it was originally created in. Hence, it can safely be
imported in any other scene.
Additionally, the Library view's Drawing Substitutions panel allows you to quickly change the current frame's
exposure to one of the existing drawings in a layer. This is especially useful for animating a cut-out character's
mouths, hands, eyelids and other such body parts which typically contain several drawings to choose from.

How to access the Library view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Library.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Library.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The Library menu lets you access commands related to the Libraryview, importing .swf movies and Illustrator files, add a new folder, and365

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

SectionDescription

refresh the library’s content.
The Preview window lets you see the content of the currently selected
template or symbol in the Template/Symbol list.

Preview Window

Preview Playback

The Preview Playback button lets you play back the content of theselected template or symbol if it contains more than one frame. Pressthe Play button to play back the preview.
The Library Folder List displays all the folders linked to the Libraryview.

There are two default folders:
Library Folder Listll

Symbols: This folder is the only folder containing symbols. You
can organize it by adding subfolders inside.
Harmony Essentials Library: This is a default folder found on
the hard drive in your user documents. This folder can containtemplates, but no symbols.

You can link new library folders to the Library view and organize themwith subfolders.
When working on a movie or series, you will probably end up withmany templates and symbols in your library. Using the Search tool,
you can quickly find the templates and symbols in your folders.
Library Search tool

366

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

Template/Symbol List

The Template/Symbol list displays the templates or symbols
contained in the selected library folder. You can display the templates
by right-clicking the symbols’ thumbnails and selecting View >Thumbnails.
A slider could be used to adjust the display size of thumbnails in the
Library view.

Slider367

Chapter 6: Views

Master Controller View
T-RIG3-008-008
The Master Controller view allows you to quickly find, select and display Master Controllers in the current
scene.

How to add the Master Controller view to your workspace
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on

Add View and select Master

Controller.
l

Icon

In the top menu, select Windows > Master Controller.

SectionDescription

Path

Allows you to select a group in the current scene. When a group is selected,
only the Master Controllers within that group will be listed in the Master
Controllers list. This can be useful if you have several characters and only
want the list of Master Controllers for a specific character.

Filter368

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

Name

Allows you to filter the Master Controllers in the Master Controllers list by
their path or name. When you type something in this field, only the Master
Controllers that contain the text you typed in their full path including theirname will be listed in the Master Controllers list.

Master Controllers

MasterControllers

Allows you to select one of the Master Controllers in your scene. This list
displays the Master Controllers in your scene with their full path in the grouphierarchy. Groups in the hierarchy are separated by forward slashes (/).
If a group is selected in the Path list, only the Master Controllers within thisgroup will appear in the list. If anything is typed in the Name field, only Master
Controllers with this text in their full path including their name will appear in
the list. Otherwise, all the Master Controllers in your scene are listed.

Refresh List

Refreshes the Path list if there are any changes in the name or hierarchy ofgroups in your scene, as well as the Master Controllers list if there are anychanges in the Master Controllers in your scene.

Locate and SelectMaster Controller

If a Master Controller is selected in the Master Controllers list, clicking on thisbutton will select the actual Master Controller node. It will also make theNode View navigate instantly to and focus on that Master Controller node.

Show Master
Controller

If a Master Controller is selected in the Master Controllers list, clicking on thisbutton will display its widget in the Camera view.

369

Chapter 6: Views

Message Log View
The Message log view displays information gathered during a render task, such as which frames and at whattime they were each rendered. The view also contains a list of the colour recovery operations.

How to access the Message Log view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Message Log.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

370

button and select Message Log.

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Metadata Editor View

The Metadata Editor view lets you access the information of the props and anchors to be exported to Unity.
NOTE
Because the Unity game engine does not support Unicode characters, it is recommended to avoid
using it in scenes intended for games.

How to access the Metadata Editor viewlIn the top-right corner of a view, click the Add Viewl

In the top menu, select Windows > Metadata Editor.

Parameter

button and select Metadata Editor.

Description
This is a list of optional parameters you can create in a scene project to beexported to Unity. It will not have any incentive towards your scene assets, but
can help developers know what to do with the assets contained in your Harmony
scene.

Scene Metadata

Once in Unity, scene Metadata will appear in Inspector view > Metadata when the
Asset is selected in the Hierarchy view.
Name: Name of the Scene entry. (e.g. game.Armor001)

371

Chapter 6: Views

Value: This can be anything that describes the state of an object. You could, forexample, have three different stages of armour: new, damaged and destroyed.
Displays only the props and anchors held inside your selection. If nothing isselected, no information will display. Name and value appear in this box as well.
Name will show you the associated .tvg name and value will be set as either On
or Off, depending on whether you want the connection to be set as active or not.
Once in Unity, scene Metadata will appear in the Hierarchy view.
Node Metadata
Name: Name of the selected anchor or prop. (e.g. game.isAnchor). Notice that it
differs from the drawing layer name on the top-left corner of the Node Metadata
section.
Value: Can be set to be active (On) or inactive (Off).

NOTE
For any anchor or prop information created within the Metadata Editor, the naming convention
must always use the prefix "game.". The term "game." is recognized automatically by Unity as a
metadata information. For example: game.Armor001.

372

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Python Script Console View

The Python Script Console View provides a Python representation of Harmony and its loaded project. This
allows for custom tools and automation tasks both within Harmony's GUI and external to Harmony from a
Python Interpreter.

How to access the Python Script Console view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Python Script Console.

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Python Script Console.

NOTE
In order to use the Python Script Console, you will need to have Python 3.9.X installed. Please
make sure it is installed and available on the system environment PATH.

373

Chapter 6: Views

Script Editor View
The Scripting view allows you to edit scripts to run in Harmony directly from the application. It displays a list ofavailable scripts, from which you can select an existing script, edit it, test it and save it. The Script Editor will
highlight the syntax of your script for easy reading.

How to access the Script Editor view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Script Editor.

Parameter

Description

Script Editor
menu

The menu for this view—see Script Editor View Menu on page 155.

Script Editor
toolbar

The toolbar for this view—see Script Editor Toolbar on page 326.

The list of script files available as well as their location and their read and write permissions.
Selecting a script in this list will open it in the editor.
Script list

NOTE
The << Sandbox >> item at the top of the list does not correspond to an actual script file. It
is a temporary container to type and test code, and its content cannot be saved.

374

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

The file list has three columns: File, Location and Permissions.
l

The File column indicates the filename of each script.

NOTE
The << Sandbox >> item at the top of the list does not correspond to an actual
script file. It is a temporary container to type and test code, and its content cannot
be saved.

l

The Location of the script can be one of the following:lApplication Folder: Scripts that are packaged and installed with Harmony. Bydefault, you cannot edit these scripts until you select them and click on Make
Editable, at which point you are prompted to copy the script to a location fromwhich you can edit them.
Scripts in the Application Resources folder are in the following location:lllWindows: C:\Program Files (x86)\Toon Boom
Animation\Toon Boom Harmony 24
Essentials\resources\scripts
macOS: /Applications/Toon Boom Harmony 24
Essentials/Harmony
Essentials.app/Contents/tba/resources/scripts

User: Scripts that are saved in your user preferences. Those scripts can beedited and executed from any scene, provided that you are logged in as thesame user.
Scripts in the User folder are in the following location:
l

l

l

l

Windows: C:\Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\Toon Boom
Animation\Toon Boom Harmony Essentials\2401-scripts
macOS: /Users/[username]/Library/Preferences/Toon Boom
Animation/Toon Boom Harmony Essentials/2401-scripts

Scene: Scripts in the scripts sub-folder of the currently open scene. These
scripts can only be edited and executed when the current scene is open.
System Variable: Scripts inside the directory set in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable, if this variable is set. These scripts
can be edited and executed by anyone on your workstation.

375

Chapter 6: Views

NOTE
When two or more scripts with the same file name exist in different locations,Harmony will give priority to a single one of these scripts. The script given priority
will be the one listed in the Script Editor and the one executed if it is associated toa toolbar button.
Which script is prioritized is determined by the order of priority of script locations.
From highest priority to lowest priority, the order goes as follows:
User > Scene > System Variable > Application Resources
An exception to this rule is if you have a script with the same name in both thescene folder and your user preferences. In this case, both versions of the script will
be listed and you will be able to edit both.

l

The Permissions of the script can be one of the following:lRead Only: You cannot edit the script in the Script Editor and save yourchanges.

NOTES
l

l

l

If the script's location is the Application Resources folder, it will
always be Read Only to prevent you from making changes to scripts
packaged with Harmony. However, you can click on the Make
Editable button below the script editor to make a copy of the script inyour user preferences folder, after which you can make changes tothis copy.
If the script is in any other location and is Read Only, then it is likelythat a network administrator made the script or the folder containing
the script read-only to prevent other users from making unwantedchanges to it.

Read/Write: You can edit the script in the Script Editor and save your changes.

A text field in which you can edit the selected script.

EditorNOTE
If the selected script is in the Application Resources folder, you will not be able to edit it
until you click on the Make Editable button.

Search toolbar

Allows you to type in a keyword and search for this keyword within the script. You can use the
Next button to go to the next instance of the keyword and thePrevious button to go to
the previous instance.

CancelIf you have made any changes to your script that you have not yet saved, this discards thosechanges and reloads the saved version.

376

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Restore to
Default

If the selected script is a script that was packaged with Harmony, and which you copied to yourUser folder or to the Scene folder to make changes to it, you can click on this button to delete
this copy of this script and resume using the original version of the script that is packaged with
Harmony instead.

IMPORTANTThis will permanently delete your version of the script and any changes you have made toit.

VerifyVerifies that the script has no syntax error.
If the currently selected script is in the Application Resources folder, you cannot edit it. By
clicking on this button, the script can be copied to a location where you can edit it.
When you click on this button, you are prompted to choose whether to copy in either of theselocations:ll

Make Editablel

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You will be able
to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as the same user.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will be able to edit
and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_
LOCATION environment variable. This option is only available if this environment
variable is set.

NOTE
This button will be greyed out if the script is in any location other than Application
Resources and is read only.

Saves the modifications you made to the script.
Save

This button replaces the Make Editable button after you have used the Make Editable button tocopy the script to a location from which you can edit it.

377

Chapter 6: Views

Side View
T-HFND-008-015
The Side view is used mainly for multiplane scenes and to position elements in 3D space. It allows you to see
a scene’s stage from the side. This lets the camera cone and spacing between the elements to be seen.

How to access the Side view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Side.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Side.

SectionDescription

Thumbnails

A thumbnail of each drawing layer in the scene. The
order of the thumbnail images is based on eachelement’s FB position in the scene space. You can see
a representation of the FB position of each layer in thecamera cone.

Camera Cone

The camera cone represents the camera’s position and378

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

field-of-view (FOV).

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain yourorientation when navigating in the view.

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspective
view.
This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from thelist. Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available;
you can also select Fit To View to automatically use azoom level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Zoom Menu

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer anddrawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in thepalette.

379

Chapter 6: Views

Timeline View
T-HFND-006-002
To set your animation timing, you will mostly work with the Timeline and Xsheet views. It's extremely useful
to become familiar with the Timeline view, how it works, and its interface.
The Timeline view is the main view used when adjusting the timing of drawings, adding keyframes andordering layers. The Timeline view displays layers, effects, sounds, keyframe values, scene length, layer
names, drawings, keyframes, timing, and frames.

The Timeline view allows you to read your timing from left to right. It represents the scene’s elements in theirsimplest form. You can also see the layers and their names, as well as the drawing’s exposure. The drawing
name is displayed when you place your pointer over the drawing’s exposure.

How to access the Timeline view
Do one of the following:380Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guidel

From the top menu, select Windows > Timeline.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

Sectionbutton and select Timeline.

Description
The Enable/Disable All button lets you enable or disable layers. Disablinga layer makes the scene behave as if it didn't exist, including whenrendering the scene. For example:l

A disabled drawing layer will be invisible.

l

A disabled sound layer will be mute.

l

A disabled peg layer will not affect the position of its child layers.

To disable a layer, click the layer's Enable/Disable button or press D.

Enable/Disable Layer

To enable a layer, click the layer's Enable/Disable button or press A.

NOTE
Next to sound layers, the Enable/Disable layer button will look like
this:

.

TIP
You can enable or disable all layers by clicking on the Enable ordisable all layers
button in the top row.

Enable/Disable Solo
Mode

Solo mode allows you to only view specific layers in the Camera view andhide all others. When solo mode is enabled on one layer, only this layer
will be visible. If solo mode is enabled on several layers, and only theselayers will be visible. If solo mode is not enabled on any layer, all enabledlayers will be visible.
You can also use solo mode on sound tracks. If solo mode is enabled on
any sound tracks, only those sound tracks will play during playback.

381

Chapter 6: Views

TIP
When some layers are in solo mode, you can disable or re-enablesolo mode on all layers that have it enabled by clicking on the
Toggle solo mode on or off
button in the top row.

For when the Onion Skin option is enabled, this allows you to enable ordisable Onion Skin on specific layers.

Add to/Remove fromOnion Skin

TIP
To activate the general Onion Skin preview, in the Tools toolbar,
click the Onion Skin button

The Lock/Unlock Layer button lets you prevent the selection or editing ofa layer in the Camera view. To select some of the layers without selecting
others, in the Timeline view, lock the layers you do not want to select.
When a layer is locked, its name is displayed in red.
Lock/Unlock Layer

In the top menu, there is a series of locking options. Select Animation >Lock > select one of the following:382

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guidel

Lock: Locks the currently selected element.

l

Unlock: Unlocks the currently selected element.

lLock All: Locks all the elements in the Camera view.

l

Unlock All: Unlocks all the elements in the Camera view.

lLock All Others: Locks all the elements in the Camera view
except the currently selected one.

Each drawing layer has a little colour swatch that has two functionalities:lSingle-clicking a layer's colour swatch toggles Outline mode on
or off. Outline mode makes the layer display as nothing but theoutlines of its vector shapes in the Camera view, allowing you to
see the drawing's shape without it blocking the view of layers
behind it.

Toggle Outline Mode /Change Track ColourlDouble-clicking the layer's colour swatch opens a colour picker
dialog that allows you to change the layer's track colour. The trackcolour displays in the layer's track in the Timeline view, allowing
you to give special visibility to specific layers. It also determines
the colour of the layer's outlines if it's in outline mode.

Expands the layer to display a thumbnail of the drawing in the current
frame, as well as for each drawing in the timeline.

Show/HideThumbnails

NOTE
By default, the timeline's zoom level does not allow enoughhorizontal space to fully display the thumbnails of drawings
exposed for one or two frames only. To see the thumbnails fordrawings with short exposure, you must increase the timeline's
zoom level—see Timeline Zoom on page 388.

383

Chapter 6: Views

When a drawing layer is in Show Thumbnails mode:ll

An exposure indicator appears at the right of each exposeddrawing in the timeline, indicating the amount of frames thedrawing spans over.
An Opacity parameter appears to the left of the layer, allowing
you to set the layer's opacity level.

TIP
You can show or hide thumbnails for all drawing layers by clicking
on the Show/Hide All Thumbnails

button in the top row.

Allows you to set the opacity level of the layer. Click and drag the value
left or right to decrease or increase the layer's opacity.
Opacity

NOTEThis parameter only displays for drawing layers that are in Show
Thumbnails mode.

This icon appears next to the active drawing layer, which is the layer you
draw on when using drawing tools.

Active Drawing Layer
Indicator

Add Layer

NOTE
The active drawing layer is not always the selected layer. For
example, if you select a drawing layer, then a peg layer, the peg
layer will be the selected layer, but the active drawing layer willremain the last drawing layer you selected, until you select anotherdrawing layer.

The Add Layers button lets you add new layers to the Timeline view.
When you click the Add Layers button, a menu appears displaying the384Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guideavailable layer types.

DeleteThe Delete Layers button lets you delete the currently selected layers in
the Timeline view.

Add Drawing Layer

The Add Drawing Layer button lets you automatically add a new drawing
layer to the Timeline view. By default, the layer is named Drawing.
The Add Peg button lets you add a peg layer to the timeline. If several
layers are selected, a peg is added and parented to each layer.

Add Peg

The Expand/Collapse button is used to display the children layers of aparent layer. Once a layer is parented to another layer, it is indented to
the right and the Collapse/Expand Children button appears on the parent
layer allowing you to show or hide the child layer.
Expand/Collapse

The Show/Hide Functions button lets you display the functions
embedded in each layer. The functions are the different coordinates andvalues used to record a layer’s parameters at each frame. This informationis stored on the function curves using keyframes.

Show/Hide Functions

If the layer can be connected to another layer, for example to use adrawing layer as a matte, expanding a layer's functions will also list its
possible connections. You can connect layers by dragging and dropping alayer onto another layer's connection.

Add/Remove
Keyframe

Adds a keyframe at the current frame of the selected function or removes
the keyframe at the current frame of the selected function, if there is one

385

Chapter 6: Views

already.

NOTE
This button only displays for function layers.

Moves the timeline cursor to the previous keyframe on the selectedfunction.
Previous Keyframe

NOTE
This button only displays for function layers.

Moves the timeline cursor to the next keyframe on the selected function.
Next Keyframe

NOTE
This button only displays for function layers.

Displays the Function menu, which allows you to create a new function
for the function layer, or to link it to an existing shared function.
Function Menu

NOTE
This button only displays for functions layers, in the Parameterscolumn—see Show/Hide Parameters on page 387.

A frame where the value for one or more of the layer's functions is preset.
The position of each layers in key poses for digital animation is recorded
in function keyframes. You can grab and move function keyframes as wellas copy, cut, paste and delete them.

TIP
Function Keyframe

If you have a keyframe and a drawing selected simultaneously, andyou wish to delete the keyframe without deleting the drawing's
exposure by doing one of the following:l

In the Timeline toolbar, click on the Delete Keyframe
button.

l

Press F7.

l

From the top menu, select Animation > Delete Keyframe

386

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

NOTE
If a collapsed layer has children that have function keyframes, youwill see a white squareinstead.

The Split button lets you split the Timeline view in two sections, allowing
you to see two different portions of the Timeline view. This can be useful
if you need to often switch between two specific points of a lengthy
scene.

Split

Drawing Exposure

In the Timeline view, when a drawing is exposed, it is represented by agrey block that extends from the first frame it is exposed to the last frame
it is exposed.

Shows or hides the Parameters column, right of the Layers column. The
Parameters column displays information on the layer at the current frame,depending on the type of layer it is:lll

If the layer is a drawing, it displays the name of the drawing at thecurrent frame.
If the layer is a function, it displays the value of the function at thecurrent frame.
If the layer is a sound track, it displays the sound track's volume.

Show/HideParameters

387

Chapter 6: Views

Using the mouse, you can drag the parameter left and right to change its
value. This is especially useful for quickly changing a drawing's exposure
at the current frame.
Shows or hides the Additional Links column. The Additional Links column
displays layers that are connected under the layer, but for other purposes
than being the parent of those layers. For example, if a layer is used as
the matte of an effect, the effect will be displayed in that layer's
Additional Links.
If more than one layers are in a layer's Additional Links, only the first ofthese layers will be displayed, followed by the amount of extra linked
layers there are.

Show/Hide Additional
Links

Timeline Zoom

By clicking on the Additional Links, you can open a menu listing the linked
layers, and click on one of these layers to navigate to it.
In the following example, the BOOM_Animation layer is used as thematte of Cutter_1 and Cutter_2:

Reduces or increases the width of frames in the Timeline view. Move theslider right to increase the width or left to reduce it. You can also press 2
to zoom in and 1 to zoom out when the Timeline view is focused on.
If you want to reset the Timeline view's zoom, click on the Timeline Zoon
icon left of the slider.

388

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Tool Properties View
T-HFND-004-002
The Tool Properties view contains the most common options and operations related to the currently selected
tool. When you select a tool from the Tools toolbar, the Tool Properties view updates.
For example, if you choose the Select tool, the Tool Properties view will display the options and operations
related to it, such as Snap to Contour, Apply to All Drawings, Flip Horizontal, and Flatten.

NOTE
To learn more about the options appearing in the Tool Properties view, see Tools Properties on
page 198.

How to access the Tool Properties view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Tool Properties.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

389

button and select Tool Properties.

Chapter 6: Views

Top View
T-HFND-008-014
The Top view is used mainly for multiplane scenes and to position elements in 3D space. It allows you to see
the scene’s stage from above. This lets the camera cone and the spacing between the elements be seen.

How to access the Top view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Top.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Top.

SectionDescription

Thumbnails

A thumbnail of each drawing layer in the scene. The
order of the thumbnail images is based on eachelement’s FB position in the scene space. You can see
a representation of the FB position of each layer in thecamera cone.

Camera Cone

The camera cone represents the camera’s position andfield-of-view (FOV).

390

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain yourorientation when navigating in the view.

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspective
view.
This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from thelist. Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available;
you can also select Fit To View to automatically use azoom level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Zoom Menu

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer anddrawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in thepalette.

391

Chapter 6: Views

Xsheet View
T-HFND-006-003
The Xsheet view lets you read the timing vertically by displaying it in a grid, with each drawing layer
represented by a column, each frame of your scene represented by a row, and each exposed drawing
displayed by its name in the cells. It is meant to work like a traditional animation exposure sheet.
Using the functions panel, you can also view the functions and keyframes of the motion paths for the selectedcolumn, with the value of those functions for each frame listed in the cells.
Contrary to the Timeline view, the Xsheet view does not display pegs, effects or layer hierarchy. Hence, it is
optimized for traditional and paperless animation, whereas the Timeline view is optimized for digital or cut-out
animation.

How to access the Xsheet view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Xsheet.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

392

button and select Xsheet.

Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

View Toolbar

The view toolbar contains all the tools and options
you can use in the Xsheet view to manage columns
and timing.
The Xsheet view has three sections. By default, only
the main section is visible. It displays the drawing
layers, also known as drawing columns.

When using advanced compositing and animation
techniques, unconnected functions (motion paths)
also appear in the main section. Unconnectedfunctions mean that some motion paths are notattached to any particular layer.

Xsheet Main Section

When you reconnect functions to a layer, they are stillvisible in the main section.

The Functions section is used for more advanced

Functions Section393

Chapter 6: Views

techniques. This section displays the functions (paths)
related to the selected layer in the Timeline view. By
default, the Functions section is hidden.
In the Xsheet view, click the Expand button located on
the right side of the main section. Click on the same
button to collapse it. You can also use the Show
Column List button in the Xsheet View toolbar. If you
select a drawing column in the main section of the
Xsheet view, the function columns will not be
displayed. You must select the layer from the Timelineview.

The Column List section allows you to show and hidecolumns in the Xsheet view. When you hide a layer inthe Xsheet view, it is also disabled in the Timelineview.

Column List Section
You can use the Column List to hide individualcolumns or hide an entire column type (drawing orfunction) from the Xsheet view. By default, theFunctions section is hidden.
In the Xsheet view, click the Expand button on theright side of the main section to show the Functions
section. Click on the same button to collapse it. You
can also use the Show Column List
Xsheet toolbar.

394

button in theHarmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

Go to the Xsheet view menu and select View > Show
Column List. Click the Expand button on the right sideof the Functions section to display the Column List
section.

Each column available in the Xsheet view has aheader displaying the column’s name. The column’sname is the same as the corresponding timeline layer.
If you rename one or the other, they will both berenamed.
A quick access menu is available when you right-click.
This menu contains the command affecting an entire
column such as renaming, changing the default
colour, or deleting a column.
The tooltip that appears when you hover at the top ofeach Xsheet column shows the folder path to thesource drawings for that column.

Column Header

In Harmony, the column header shows the layer’s
name and the name of the drawing folder to which it
is linked. If the name of the layer is the same as thedrawing folder, the drawing folder’s name will not be
displayed. To modify the name of the element folder
independently from the column and layer name, youmust select the Advanced Element Mode option
preference in the Advanced tab of the Preferences
dialog box.

395

Chapter 6: Views

A drawing selected in dark red indicates that thedrawing is currently displayed in the Drawing and
Camera views. The current drawing selection is not
linked to the drawing displayed in the Camera view
since drawings from each visible layer are displayed
at once.

Current Drawing

The darker frame appearing in the Xsheet view
represents the current frame.

Current FrameIn the drawing columns, you can see the drawing
names and their exposure. You can use anyalphanumeric symbol to name your drawing. When adrawing is exposed over more than one cell, a vertical
black line is displayed to indicate the continuity of the
exposure. When there is no drawing in a cell, the cell
will be blank.

Drawing Exposure

396Harmony 24 Essentials Reference Guide

On the left side of the Xsheet view, the frame
numbers are shown indicating where you are. These
read vertically instead of being displayed horizontallyas they are in the Timeline view.
l

To go to a particular frame, click the frame
number.

Frame NumberslTo select an entire range of frames, click anddrag a selection downwards.

At the bottom-right of the Xsheet view, you can see
the current frame number, as well as the column
containing the drawing currently displayed in the
Drawing view.
Current Frame Display

The functions columns are displayed in the Functions
section of the Xsheet view. They represent the motion
and rotation you applied to a drawing layer.
A function column can also be related to an effect.
Selecting the effect layer shows you thecorresponding function column in the Xsheet view.

Functions Column

The function columns display the position value or
effect value on each cell. If there is a keyframe on acell, a black square is displayed. Holding the samevalue for several frames displays a vertical black line.

397

Chapter 6: Views

You can quickly increase or decrease the exposure of
the selected cell by clicking on the up and downarrows in the Increase/Decrease Exposure field.

Increase/Decrease
Exposure

The Overwrite/Insert button allows you to decide theway the values are inserted into the Xsheet.

Overwrite/Insert Modes

398